The URL can be used to link to this page

MARSHALL STREET AND NE WRF ALUM FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS - 16-0012-UT ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT Iozl::rtIlH ,"ur'wV:RBV.AV,1F11911ll, BA)i IIX;j WEA(11 CONSTRUCTION DIVISION OFFICE COMMUNICATION TO: Todd Kuhnel SUBJECT: One Year Warranty Check CEI/INSPECTOR: PROJECT COMPLETION DATE: 09/01/19 PROJECT NAME/#: Marshall St& NE WRF Alum Feed Improvements 16-0012-UT CONTRACTOR: Odyssey Manufacturing 1484 Massaro Blvd Tampa, FL 33916 813 635-0339 INSPECTOR: Randy Foltz DATE: 8/26/2020 COMMENTS: The system is working as design, no problems to report. SIGNATURE: KptfqiNbsufmmj NjdibfmB{{bsfmmb UpeeLviofm Contractor: Odyssey Manufacturing Project: Marshall St and NE WRF System Feed Improvements Project 16-0012-UT Walkthrough Date: 8/26/19 Engineering Department 100 S. Myrtle Avenue, #220 PUNCH LIST Punch List Completion Due Date: 9/9/19 Clearwater, FL 33756 Attendees: Todd Kuhnel, Joe Martelli, Ryan Alexander, Randy Barnoski, Mike Azzerella Date Signed Inspected OffBy No.DescriptionPhoto(s) 1 Marshall St 2 Extend vent for Skid Calibration Column Discharge 3 Plug secondary pump skid discharge 4 Label Skid pumps #1 and #2 5 Hang corrosion inhibitor in control panel (Rocha) 6 Remove concrete from rear of control bldg. 7 Clean up and add dirt at the new sidewalk panel location 8 Clean up new containment area 9 Clean up concrete and area around outside eyewash 10 Remove permit box 11 Add double electrical conduit strut in the mezzanine room south east corner 12 Cut in paint to the outside bottom wall of the control bldg. 13 Supply O & M Manuals for the project 14 Remove project sign 15 Add a max limit label to both Alum tanks Adjust the totalizers for current day, and previous day for usage. This will need to be in GPD 16 (Rocha) 17 18 NE WRF 19 Remove project sign 20 Remove permit box 21 Complete sod restoration 22 Complete concrete finish work 23 Remove debris from the containment area and across the driveway at the spoil pile location 24 Cut in paint at the bottom of the bollards 25 Paint reclaimed pipe connected to the wall behind the containment area 26 Remove old struts, pipe supports and concrete blocks by the old skid pump location 27 Clean up concrete,grade and sod from the fiber line trench to the control panel pump house 28 Supply O & M Manuals for the project 29 In the control panel pump house remove the flex conduit and install rigid conduit 30 Inside the containment area touch up orange paint and remove paint splatter from tank #2 and floor 31 Grade and slope area rear of containment area 32 Containment area replace tank #2 tag/label 33 Cut back bolts from control panel mounts in containment area 34 Add a max limit label to both Alum tanks Adjust the totalizers for current day, and previous day for usage. This will need to be in GPD 35 (Rocha) Page 1 of 1 MARSHALL STREET AND NE WRF ALUM FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS (16 -0012 -UT) CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS Prepared for BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH CONFORMED October 2018 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 2 for 3 Marshall Street and NE WRF Alum Feed Improvement 4 CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 5 Project Number 16 -0012 -UT 6 7 8 DATE: September 5, 2018 9 10 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 1 11 12 TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned 13 14 15 Bidders on this project are hereby notified that Addendum No. 1 shall be attached to and made part of the 16 above-named Bid Specification Documents. 17 18 This addendum is issued to modify the previously issued Bid Specification Documents and is hereby 19 made Part of the Bid Specification Documents. Please attach this addendum to the Contract Documents in 20 your possession. 21 22 Contractor Questions: 23 24 Odyssey Manufacturing Company 25 26 1) 0: Drawing C-1-02 (Marshall Street): There is a note to install +/-140 LF of conduit w/two Y2" 27 polybraid hoses. The drawing shows three lines. How many conduits shall the Contractor 28 install? 29 A: The outer lines delineate the existing pipe chase. The 3" PVC Electrical with (2) 16" polybraid 30 tubing callout is correct. 31 2) 0: Drawing M-03: Details "D" and "E" state that the tubing is 1". The actual location shown on 32 this sheet and drawing C-01-02 state tubing is A". Please confirm tubing is 14" and not 1". 33 A: The drawings specify 1" polybraid tubing for pump suction and 14" polybraid for pump 34 discharge. 35 3) Q: Drawing M-03: In one section the 3" containment piping is specified as Schedule 80 PVC and 36 in another detail it is specified as Schedule 40 PVC. We recommend it be Schedule 80 PVC. 37 A: Provide containment piping as specified for each section per drawings. 38 4) Q: Drawing C-1-02 (Marshall Street): Is the proposed 34" injection piping inside a containment 39 pipe run in an existing trench or shall contractor select path in the ground to run the piping. 40 A: Marshall Street uses an existing pipe chase. Northeast is run underground to provide the 41 shortest distance to the discharge point. 1 5) 0: Drawing C-1-02 (Marshall Street): Drawing M-03 shows the termination of the 3" conduit 2 shown in the building. There is no drawing or detail showing the termination on the other or 3 south end. Please provide. 4 A: The alum feed will discharge to atmosphere above the treatment train approximately four (4) 5 feet above grade. Provide a termination similar to that shown in "Containment Piping Detail" on 6 sheet M-2. The end of the containment pipe will need to be sealed to prevent the entrance of 7 rain water. 8 6) Q: Drawing D-01-02: Do the 2" Sample Line and the 4" Drain Line from the Respirator remain in 9 service? Do these lines have to be removed? 10 A: These have already been removed and are not part of the demolition scope. 11 12 7) Q: Drawing M-01-02: This drawing shows two %2" lines inside a 3" containment pipe going to 13 each injection point. This conflicts with Drawing C-01-02 (NE) which shows :1" feed lines. Please 14 confirm injection lines are 1/2". 15 A: Drawing C-1 calls out "Proposed 1" Feed Lines" The should be "Proposed'/:" feed lines in 3- 16 inch Containment" 17 18 8) 0: Drawing M-01-02: Please provide dimensions for housekeeping pads for alum tanks at the 19 NE WRF. 20 A: See structural drawings. 21 22 9) Q: At the NE WRF the drawings call for the new "Panel AF" to be NEMA 3R with no materials 23 specified. Because it is exposed to weather and chemicals we request you issue an Addendum to 24 make it NEMA 4X SS316. 25 A: Supply Panel AF as specified with no changes 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 END OF ADDENDUM No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ADDENDUM NO. 2 2 for 3 Marshall Street and NE WRF Alum Feed Improvement 4 CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 5 Project Number 16 -0012 -UT 6 7 8 DATE: September 14, 2018 9 10 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 2 11 12 TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned 13 14 15 Bidders on this project are hereby notified that Addendum No. 1 shall be attached to and made part of the 16 above-named Bid Specification Documents. 17 18 This addendum is issued to modify the previously issued Bid Specification Documents and is hereby 19 made Part of the Bid Specification Documents. Please attach this addendum to the Contract Documents in 20 your possession. 21 22 Contractor Questions: 23 24 Poole & Kent Company of Florida 25 26 Q: (17120-1.1.A): The specification calls out to "Provide and install new UO Modules in the 27 existing PLC rack located in the existing RTD Subpanel". The only PLC panel modifications that 28 are shown on the contract drawings are on sheet I-4, and these are for the existing Marshall St & 29 N.E. WRF PLC panels. I did not see an existing RTD Subplate. Please clarify if the existing RTD 30 Subpanel exists. If it does exist, please clarify what drawing it is on. 31 32 A: Replace Specification 17120-1.1.A with the following: 33 34 Provide and install new UO Modules in the new Chemical Feed Control Panels to be provided 35 under this contract. 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 END OF ADDENDUM No. 1 CERTIFICATIONS Section IVa of the Technical Specifications contained in this document MARSHALL STREET AND NE WRF ALUM FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS (16 -0012 -UT) CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS was prepared by, or under the direct supervision of the undersigned, professional engineers registered in the State of Florida. These Specifications are certified as follows: Civil Engineer Divisions 2, 5, 9, 11, 15 Metzger & Willard, Inc. 8600 Hidden River Parkway Suite 550 Tampa FL 33637 813.977.6005 Certificate of Authorization No. 2886, LB 7302 M. Joseph Martelli III, PE 74038 Date Electrical & Instrumentation Engineer Division 16 Tricon Consulting Engineers 777 S. Harbor Island Blvd. Suite 870 Tampa FL 33602 813.227.9190 Certificate of Authorization No. 8363 Timothy Thomas, PE 47079 Date COVER Pagel! Structural Engineer Divisions 3, 7 Broadway Engineering, PA 1355 W. Cass Street Tampa FL 33606 813.251.9244 Certificate of Authorization No. 4599 Elizabeth A. Broadway, PEE 38558 Date Updated 6/1/2016 City of Clearwater, Florida MARSHALL STREET AND NE WRF ALUM FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS (16 -0012 -UT) TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer COVER Page 111 Updated 6/1/2016 SECTION 1 INVITATION TO BID NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS Marshall Street and Northeast WRF Alum Feed System Upgrades Documents and plans for Project # 16 -0012 -UT are available at www.myclearwater.com/bid. The work includes: The demolition of existing alum feed facilities and the installation of new alum feed facilities at the Marshall Street and NE Water Reclamation Facilities. Some structural building demolition and restoration will be required. The work will include demolition of existing facilities, the construction of a covered containment structure, new storage tanks, new feed pumps, piping, eye wash stations, power, lighting and SCADA integration. The existing alum feed systems will remain in operation until the new systems are operational Pre -Bid Conference: [Insert Date & Time here] [Insert location here] Pre -qualification DEADLINE: [Insert Date] Category: [Insert Category Type & Amount] Bids DUE: [Insert Date here] City of Clearwater, Project # 16 -0012 -UT Purchasing Office, 3rd Floor 100 S. Myrtle Ave, Clearwater, FL 33756-5520 Issued by: Alyce Benge, Purchasing Manager For additional information contact Engineering Dept.: 727-562-4750 SECTION 1 Page 1 Updated 4/7/2017 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents SECTION II i INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS i 1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1 2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1 3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1 4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2 5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3 6. CONTRACT TIME 3 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3 8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3 9. SUBCONTRACTORS 3 10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM 4 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4 12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5 13. REJECTION OF BIDS 5 14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5 15. OPENING OF BIDS 5 16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5 17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6 18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 7 19. BID PROTEST 7 20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 9 21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 9 SECTION II i Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1. Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are accessible through the City of Clearwater website at address: www.myclearwater.com/bid. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the DVC Marketing Plan Room, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non- refundable. Bidding Documents may include, but aren't limited to, plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits, bid/proposal form and Addendums. 1.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub -bidders or others. 2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1. Each prospective Bidder must pre -qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner. An application package for pre -qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. Pre -qualification requirement information is also available on the City of Clearwater Website at address: www.myclearwater.com/government/city-departments/engineering/construction- management. Contractors wanting to pre -qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre -qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm pre -qualification status before a Bid Opening. 3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer in writing of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2. For the purposes of bidding or construction, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof. Drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, may be relied upon by Bidder for accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. SECTION II Page 1 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 3.3. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6. On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8. The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1. All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed in writing to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, via the Jiffy Reprographics Plan Room to all parties recorded by the Plan Room as plan holders having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified on the pre-bid meeting agenda, prior to the date for opening of Bids, may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. 4.2. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. SECTION II Page 2 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a Proposal/Bid Bond (on form provided in Section V) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. 5.2. The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and fumish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid Opening. 5.3. The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in, the State of Florida. 6. CONTRACT TIME 6.1. The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement, Section V. 8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1. The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9. SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1. If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder SECTION II Page 3 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid Security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1. The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be printed in ink or typewritten. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which they will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4. All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1. Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a sealed envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand comer. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Bids in any other form will not be accepted. 11.2. The sealed bid envelope shall contain, but not be limited to, the Proposal/Bid Bond and corresponding Power of Attorney, Affidavit, Non Collusion Affidavit, Proposal (pages one SECTION II Page 4 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 1 ' SECTION 11- Instructions to Bidders and two), Addendum Sheet, Bidder's Proposal, and Scrutinized Companies and Business Operations with Cuba and Syria Certification Form. 12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS ' 12.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person ' duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. ' 12.2. After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the ' requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 1 13. REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1. To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City 111 reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. ' 14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1. Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists ' among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non -Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15. OPENING OF BIDS ' 15.1. Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. ' 16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1. The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply ' with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees SECTION II Page 5 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION 11— Instructions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3. The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4. The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials purchased by the City and incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, as may be indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions. 17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1. In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. SECTION II Page 6 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. 18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2. In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4. Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 18.5. The successful bidder/contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2014), specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. 19. BID PROTEST 19.1. RIGHT TO PROTEST: SECTION 0 Page 7 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2. PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3. PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4. STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. SECTION II Page 8 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction -related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction -related Best Management Practices. SECTION II Page 9 of 9 Updated 7/13/2017 I I SECTION III I GENERAL CONDITIONS I Table of Contents: 1. DEFINITIONS 1 I 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5 2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5 2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5 I 2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT 5 2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 6 1 2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6 2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS 6 I3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 6 3.1. INTENT 6 3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7 I 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 7 I 4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 7 4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 8 I 4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8 4.4. REFERENCE POINTS 8 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 9 I5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND 9 5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 9 I 5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE 9 5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE 10 5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE10 I 5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE/ERRORS OR OMISSIONS INSURANCE 10 5.2.5. CON TRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT/INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY INSURANCE ...10 5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE 10 I5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS 10 5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS 11 I6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 12 6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12 I 6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 12 6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 13 6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 14 ISECTION III i Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.5. USE OF PREMISES 14 6.5.1. STAGING AREAS 15 6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 15 6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 16 6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16 6.8. PERMITS 16 6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17 6.10. EMERGENCIES 17 6.11. DRAWINGS 18 6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18 6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19 6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 21 6.11.4. DELIVERABLES 23 6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23 6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK 23 6.14. INDEMNIFICATION 23 6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24 6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS 24 7. OTHER WORK 25 7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE 25 7.2. COORDINATION 25 8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY 26 9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION26 9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE 26 9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 26 9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 27 9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 27 9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 27 9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 28 10. CHANGES IN THE WORK 28 11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 30 11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK 31 12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 31 13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 32 13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION 32 13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK 33 SECTION III ii Updated 6/3/2016 1 SECTION III — General Conditions 13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 33 13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.5. WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD 34 13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 34 13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 35 14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 35 14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 36 14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 36 14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION 37 14.5. FINAL INSPECTION 37 14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 38 14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 38 14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS 39 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 39 15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 39 15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE 39 15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 40 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION 41 17. MISCELLANEOUS 41 17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 41 17.2. GIVING NOTICE 41 17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM 41 17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41 17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41 17.6. RENEWAL OPTION 42 17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS 42 18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 42 19. MATERIAL USED 42 20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 42 21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 42 21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS 42 21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK 43 21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS 43 21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION 44 22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 44 22.1. GENERAL 44 SECTION III iii Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 22.2. EXAMPLE 46 23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 46 23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE 46 23.2. TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 46 23.3. FIXED SIGN 47 23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS 47 23.5. SIGN COLORING 47 23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT 47 23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE 47 23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 48 24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 48 25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 49 SECTION III iv Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 1. DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the City. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the SECTION III Page 1 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III —General Conditions Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule—CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. SECTION III Page 2 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F.D.O.T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. SECTION III Page 3 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre -construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. SECTION III Page 4 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III —General Conditions Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. Pursuant to Section 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, the Notice to Proceed cannot be issued until Contractor provides City with a certified copy of the recorded bond issued by the Pinellas County Clerk of Court. SECTION III Page 5 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE After Contract has been fully executed and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at the preconstruction conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also submit a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a completed Emergency Call List, a completed Authorized Signature List, and Verification of Illegal Discharge Construction Site Training. 2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1. INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be SECTION III Page 6 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements, rights of entry for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. SECTION III Page 7 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation. The Sunshine State One Call of Florida is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. 4.4. REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, unless otherwise noted in the Contract, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per SECTION III Page 8 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one- hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond pursuant to Section 255.05, Florida Statutes in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents in Section V and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, acquire and maintain (and cause any sub- contractors, representatives or agents to acquire and maintain) during the term with the City, sufficient insurance to adequately protect the respective interest of the parties. Coverage shall be obtained with a carrier having an AM Best Rating of A -VII or better. In addition, the City has the right to review the Contractor's deductible or self-insured retention and to require that it be reduced or eliminated. Specifically the Contractor must carry the following minimum types and amounts of insurance on an occurrence basis or in the case of coverage that cannot be obtained on an occurrence basis, then coverage can be obtained on a claims -made basis with a minimum four (4) year tail following the termination or expiration of this Agreement: The following insurance limits may be achieved by a combination of primary and umbrella/excess liability policies. 5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage, including but not limited to, premises operations, products/completed operations, products liability, contractual liability, advertising injury, personal injury, death, and property damage in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) per occurrence and $2,000,000 (two million dollars) general aggregate. SECTION III Page 9 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance coverage for any owned, non -owned, hired or borrowed automobile is required in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) combined single limit. 5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Statutory Workers' Compensation Insurance coverage in accordance with the laws of the State of Florida, and Employer's Liability Insurance in the minimum amount of $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each employee each accident, $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each employee by disease and $500,000 (five hundred thousand dollars) aggregate by disease with benefits afforded under the laws of the State of Florida. Coverage should include Voluntary Compensation, Jones Act, and U.S. Longshoremen's and Harbor Worker's Act coverage where applicable. Coverage must be applicable to employees, contractors, subcontractors, and volunteers, if any. 5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE/ERRORS OR OMISSIONS INSURANCE Professional Liability/Malpractice/Errors or Omissions Insurance coverage appropriate for the type of business engaged in by the Contractor with minimum limits of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) per occurrence. If a claims made form of coverage is provided, the retroactive date of coverage shall be no later than the inception date of claims made coverage, unless prior policy was extended indefinitely to cover prior acts. Coverage shall be extended beyond the policy year either by a supplemental extended reporting period (ERP) of as great a duration as available, and with no less coverage and with reinstated aggregate limits, or by requiring that any new policy provide a retroactive date no later than the inception date of claims made coverage. 5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT/INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY INSURANCE If Contractor is using its own property in connection with the performance of its obligations under this Agreement, then Contractor's Equipment—Inland Marine Insurance and/or Property Insurance on an "All Risks" basis with replacement cost coverage for property and equipment in the care, custody and control of others is recommended. City is not responsible for Contractor's (or any sub -contractors, representatives, or agents) equipment or property. 5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE The City will provide at its expense, Builder's Risk Insurance for the project to cover all risks of loss in the complete and full value of the project. Contractor agrees to cooperate in a timely manner with providing any information or documentation required for the application and by the carrier as the project proceeds. 5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS Upon approval of this Agreement by City Council, and then annually upon the anniversary date(s) of the insurance policy's renewal date(s) for as long as this Agreement remains in effect, the Contractor will furnish the City with a Certificate of Insurance(s) (using appropriate ACORD SECTION III Page 10 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION 111— General Conditions certificate, SIGNED by the Issuer, and with applicable endorsements) evidencing all of the coverage set forth above and naming the City as an "Additional Insured." In addition when requested in writing from the City, Contractor will provide the City with certified copies of all applicable policies. The address where such certificates and certified policies shall be sent or delivered is as follows: City of Clearwater Engineering Department Attn: Construction Office Specialist P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 1. The Description (of Operations/LocationsNehicles) should specify Project Name and Project Number. 2. Contractor shall provide thirty (30) days written notice of any cancellation, non -renewal, termination, material change or reduction in coverage. 3. Contractor's insurance as outlined above shall be primary and non-contributory coverage for Contractor's negligence. 4. Contractor reserves the right to appoint legal counsel to provide for the Contractor's defense, for any and all claims that may arise related to Agreement, work performed under this Agreement, or to Contractor's design, equipment, or service. Contractor agrees that the City shall not be liable to reimburse Contractor for any legal fees or costs as a result of Contractor providing its defense as contemplated herein. The stipulated limits of coverage above shall not be construed as a limitation of any potential liability to the City, and the City's failure to request evidence of this insurance shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor's (or sub -contractors, representatives, or agents) obligation to provide the insurance coverage specified. 5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub -contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting SECTION III Page 11 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6. CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, disrespectful or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor represents the City of Clearwater and shall conduct themselves in a professional manner to the public at all times. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $80.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good SECTION III Page 12 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor shall adhere to the Community Development Code, Section 3-1508 regarding noise restrictions from 6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. any day and all day Sunday. Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment or materials to be incorporated into the Work under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, per Section III, Article 21. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. 6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. Request for substitute shall identify why a substitute is submitted and include advantages to the Owner. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute SECTION III Page 13 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5. USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any SECTION III Page 14 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1. STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. Use of right of way within the limits of construction must be approved by the City. All applicable erosion control, tree barricade and restoration, including time limits, specifications, etc., must be followed. 6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. • Any irrigation systems or components damaged or impacted by construction activities shall be repaired or replaced "in-kind" within forty-eight (48) hours to minimize the loss of turfgrass or landscape plantings, particularly during periods of drought. • Sod must be restored "in-kind" within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of driveways or sidewalks or other project specific milestone. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. SECTION III Page 15 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11-02 shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E -Verify System to verify employment eligibility. 6.8. PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. SECTION III Page 16 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when execution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10. EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or SECTION III Page 17 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11. DRAWINGS 6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will have a transmittal cover sheet identifying the shop drawing name, number, and technical specification reference; will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of SECTION III Page 18 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals, per the approved initial submittal log. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. 6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up redline prints do not conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay SECTION In Page 19 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As -Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As -Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1. General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS -BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 5J-17.052, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 5J-17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also known as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As -Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As -Built Survey. 6.11.2.2. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New and replaced service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. The terminal ends of all subdrains, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3. Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4. Electrical and Control Wiring The as -built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as -built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall SECTION III Page 20 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION III — General Conditions prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5. Horizontal and Vertical Control The As -Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6. Standards The As -Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J-17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as -built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7. Other The As -Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1. Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1. Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2. Laver Naming Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk SECTION III Page 21 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2. Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3. Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. SECTION III Page 22 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.11.4. DELIVERABLES The as -built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 "=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver two hard copies and one digital copy of all drawings. Requested file formats are: Autodesk DWG and Adobe PDF files. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail address Thomas.Mahony@myClearwater.com. 6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non -execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14. INDEMNIFICATION To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold the City, its officers, agents, and employees, harmless from and against any and all liabilities, demands, claims, suits, losses, damages, causes of action, fines or judgments, including costs, attorneys', witnesses', and expert witnesses' fees, and expenses incident thereto, relating to, arising out of, SECTION III Page 23 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION 111—General Conditions or resulting from: (i) the services provided by Contractor personnel under this Agreement; (ii) any negligent acts, errors, mistakes or omissions by Contractor or Contractor personnel; and (iii) Contractor or Contractor personnel's failure to comply with or fulfill the obligations established by this Agreement. Contractor will update the City during the course of the litigation to timely notify the City of any issues that may involve the independent negligence of the City that is not covered by this indemnification. The City assumes no liability for actions of Contractor and will not indemnify or hold Contractor or any third party harmless for claims based on this Agreement or use of Contractor -provided supplies or services. Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, this indemnification provision shall not be construed as a waiver of any immunity to which Owner is entitled or the extent of any limitation of liability pursuant to § 768.28, Florida Statutes. Furthermore, this provision is not intended to nor shall be interpreted as limiting or in any way affecting any defense Owner may have under § 768.28, Florida Statutes or as consent to be sued by third parties. 6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email addresses, etc. 6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS The ENGINEER will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2014), specifically to: a) Keep and maintain public records required by the city of Clearwater (hereinafter "public agency") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder. b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as many be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law. c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the records to the public agency. d) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for the retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency. SECTION III Page 24 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time. f) The Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in accordance with the contract. g) A Contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes. h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if: 1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public records request within a reasonable time; and 2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the public request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor. i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic format. j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement. 7. OTHER WORK 7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2. COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. SECTION III Page 25 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 8. OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1. OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. SECTION III Page 26 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. SECTION III Page 27 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. 10. CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. SECTION III Page 28 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: • changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; • changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and • changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; • provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by SECTION III Page 29 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the Work, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1 Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the Work. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full -unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor -owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand-by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances SECTION III Page 30 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. 12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract SECTION III Page 31 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, SECTION III Page 32 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by SECTION III Page 33 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5. WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if SECTION III Page 34 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed once each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as -built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site marked up as -built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have SECTION III Page 35 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION 111— General Conditions been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. 14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment, unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty-five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's SECTION III Page 36 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION 1I1— General Conditions Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5. FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. SECTION III Page 37 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, and (ii) executed consent of the surety to final payment using the form contained in Section V of the Contract Documents. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as SECTION III Page 38 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and SECTION III Page 39 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION 111— General Conditions damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract SECTION III Page 40 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17. MISCELLANEOUS 17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2. GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. SECTION 111 Page 41 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION 111— General Conditions 17.6. RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. 17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers and/or dumpsters for their disposal and hauling needs. For availability or pricing contact Mike Pryor at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, by phone: (727) 562-4923 or email: Michael.Pryor@myClearwater.com. 18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19. MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. 20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications and Technical Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality, more stringent or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with the Engineer/Architect's interpretation. 21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS The Owner reserves the right to purchase certain portions of the materials or equipment for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. The contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. Owner -purchasing of construction materials or equipment, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. The contract price shall be reduced by the actual cost of the materials or equipment purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales SECTION III Page 42 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION 111— General Conditions tax, even if the actual cost is in excess of the cost for the materials or equipment as -bid by the Contractor. For purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, however, the original, as -bid contract amount shall be used. Direct purchase shall be considered for single items or materials that exceed $10,000 in value and/or items identified in Section V, Bidders Proposal. The Contractor shall provide the Owner an ODP Summary of all intended suppliers, vendors, equipment and materials for consideration as ODP materials or equipment (refer to ODP Instructions in Contract Appendix). 21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK Owner will issue Purchase Orders and provide a copy of Owner's Florida Consumer Certification of Tax Exemption and Certificate of Entitlement directly to the Vendor for ODP materials or equipment. Invoices for ODP materials or equipment shall be issued to the Owner, and a copy sent to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the transfer of ODP materials or equipment by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all ODP materials or equipment; therefore, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss at the time of purchase or delivery of items, unless material is damaged as the result of negligence by the Contractor. 21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials or equipment furnished to the Owner including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, and inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery. The Owner shall coordinate with Contractor and Vendor delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular materials or equipment furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials or equipment. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. As ODP materials or equipment are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for items delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of ODP materials or equipment is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and/or an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward an electronic copy of the invoice and supporting documentation to the Owner for payment within fourteen (14) calendar days of receipt of said goods or materials. Such payment shall be directly from public funds, from Owner to Vendor. The Contractor shall insure that ODP materials or equipment conform to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials or equipment are patently defective, and whether such materials or equipment are identical to the materials or equipment ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non -conformities in ODP materials or equipment upon such visual inspection, the SECTION III Page 43 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials or equipment in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials or equipment can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming ODP materials or equipment, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials or equipment into the Project, including liquidated damages. 21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION The Contractor shall maintain records of all ODP materials or equipment it incorporates into Contractor's Work from the stock of ODP materials or equipment in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any ODP materials or equipment delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials or equipment which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials, equipment and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage -repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that purchases made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to ODP materials or equipment. ODP Purchase Orders must be closed out prior to closing out the contract/Contractor Purchase Order. If material costs needed for project exceed the ODP Purchase Order amount, the ODP Purchase Order will not be increased. Amounts in excess of the ODP Purchase Order will be paid for by the Contractor. 22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1. GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by SECTION III Page 44 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. SECTION III Page 45 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 22.2. EXAMPLE CITY LOGO of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing the (state project name) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, SCOPE OF WORK. 23.2. TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined SECTION III Page 46 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3. FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2 -inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4 -inch by 4 -inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24 -inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24 -inches by 30 -inches (24"x30") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 - inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 23.5. SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's logo. The Project Manager/City Representative shall provide the appropriate electronic logo file(s) to the Contractor. 23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of- way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. SECTION III Page 47 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 6' <PROJECT NAME> <CONTRACT NUMBER> <DEPARTMENT NAME> PROJECT ICONTRACTOR• COMPLETION DATE- FUNDING- OWNER'S ATE•FUNDING•OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. CEA R.WATER. -2' minimum height RIGHT AND BEAUHFUL • BAY TO BEACH 3' 61i4" ..j 4"x4" P.T.— Post (Typ.) 24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written Notice to Proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in Section IV, Scope of Work. Contract Time to commence at start date noted on the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay SECTION III Page 48 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. 25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. The certification form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted, along with all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non-responsive. If the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification form, has been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2012) then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies mentioned in the previous sentence may be asserted on a case-by-case basis, at the sole discretion of the City of Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist: A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the following must occur): 1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 2011. 2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2011. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. SECTION III Page 49 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION III — General Conditions 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized and is implementing a formal plan to cease scrutinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new scrutinized business operations. B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria: 1. The business operations were made before July 1, 2012. 2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new business operations in Cuba or Syria. Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the contract is offered. The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form. See Section V of the Contract for Certification Form to be executed and submitted with the Bid/Proposal Form. SECTION III Page 50 of 50 Updated 6/3/2016 SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Content: 100 SERIES: GENERAL 1 101. SCOPE OF WORK 1 102. FIELD ENGINEERING 2 102-1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 2 102-2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 2 103. DEFINITION OF TERMS 2 103-1. REFERENCE STANDARDS 3 104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 3 105. AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 3 105-1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING 3 105-2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING 3 105-3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 3 105-4. EQUIPMENT 4 105-5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION 4 105-6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION 4 105-7. VIEWER ORIENTATION 4 105-8. LIGHTING 4 105-9. SPEED OF TRAVEL 5 105-10. VIDEO LOG/INDEX 5 105-11. AREA OF COVERAGE 5 105-12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 5 106. STREET SIGNS 5 107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 5 107-1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 5 107-2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 6 107-3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 6 107-4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 7 107-5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 8 107-6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 8 107-7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 8 108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 8 108-1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS 8 108-2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 9 109. PROJECT WEB PAGES 9 109-1. WEB PAGES DESIGN 9 109-2. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES 9 109-3. THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE 10 SECTION IV I Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications 109-4. MAPS AND GRAPHICS 10 109-5. INTERACTIVE FORMS 10 109-6. POSTING 10 109-7. WEB PAGES UPDATES 10 200 SERIES: SITEWORK 11 201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK 11 202. OBSTRUCTIONS 12 203. DEWATERING 12 203-1. GENERAL 12 203-2. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12 204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 13 204-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 13 204-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 13 205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 13 206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 14 206-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 14 206-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 14 207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 14 207-1. GENERAL 14 207-2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL 14 207-3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 15 207-4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 15 207-5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 15 207-6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 15 207-7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 15 207-8. MAINTENANCE 15 207-9. COMPLIANCE 16 208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES. 16 208-1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS 16 208-2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION 16 208-3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL 16 208-4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL 16 208-5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY 17 208-6. RIP -RAP 17 208-7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL 17 300 SERIES: MATERIALS 18 301. CONCRETE 18 302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 18 302-1. EXCAVATION 18 302-2. FORMS 18 303. REINFORCEMENT 18 SECTION IV II Updated 3/5/2018 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications 303-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 19 304. BACKFILL 19 304-1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL 19 304-2. TESTING AND INSPECTION 19 305. RIPRAP 20 305-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 20 305-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 21 400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER 22 401. SANITARY MANHOLES 22 401-1. BUILT UP TYPE 22 401-2. PRECAST TYPE 22 401-3. DROP MANHOLES 23 401-4. FRAMES AND COVERS 23 401-5. MANHOLE COATINGS 23 401-6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 23 402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES 23 402-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 23 403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 24 403-1. MATERIALS 24 403-2. INSTALLATION 24 403-3. TESTING 25 403-4. BASIS OF PAYMENT 26 404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26 404-1. INTENT 26 404-2. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 26 404-3. MATERIALS 26 404-4. CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION 27 404-5. TELEVISION INSPECTION 28 404-6. LINER INSTALLATION 29 404-7. LATERAL RECONNECTION 29 404-8. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 29 404-9. PAYMENT 29 405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 30 405-1. SCOPE AND INTENT 30 405-2. PAYMENT 30 405-3. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 30 405-4. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 31 405-5. INFILTRATION CONTROL 32 405-6. GROUTING MIX 32 405-7. LINER MIX 32 405-8. WATER 33 405-9. OTHER MATERIALS 33 405-10. EQUIPMENT 33 405-11. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 34 SECTION IV III Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications 405-12. INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 35 500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE LINES AND APPURTENANCES 41 501. SCOPE 41 502. MATERIALS 41 502-1. GENERAL 41 502-2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41 502-3. GATE VALVES 43 502-4. VALVE BOXES 44 502-5. HYDRANTS 44 502-6. SERVICE SADDLES 45 502-7. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 45 502-8. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 46 502-9. TAPPING SLEEVES 46 502-10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 46 503. CONSTRUCTION 46 503-1. MATERIAL HANDLING 46 503-2. PIPE LAYING 47 503-3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 48 503-4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES 49 504. TESTS 49 504-1. HYDROSTATIC TESTS 49 504-2. NOTICE OF TEST 50 505. STERILIZATION 50 505-1. STERILIZING AGENT 50 505-2. FLUSHING SYSTEM 50 505-3. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE 50 505-4. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 50 505-5. BACTERIAL TESTS 50 506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 51 506-1. GENERAL 51 506-2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 51 506-3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 52 506-4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 52 506-5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 52 600 SERIES: STORMWATER 53 601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 53 601-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 53 602. UNDERDRAINS 53 602-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 53 602-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 54 SECTION IV IV Updated 3/5/2018 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION IV - Technical Specifications 603. STORM SEWERS 54 603-1. TESTING AND INSPECTION 54 603-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 55 604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES 55 604-1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 55 604-2. PRECAST TYPE 56 604-3. BASIS OF PAYMENT 56 605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 56 605-1. MATERIAL 56 605-2. PERFORMANCE 57 700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS 59 701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 59 702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 59 702-1. BASE 59 702-2. SUBGRADE 61 703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 62 703-1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 62 703-2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE 62 703-3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 63 703-4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 63 703-5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 63 703-6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 63 703-7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES 64 703-8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 64 703-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 65 703-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 65 704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 65 705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS 66 705-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 66 705-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 66 706. CONCRETE CURBS 66 706-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 66 706-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 66 707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 67 707-1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 67 707-2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 67 707-3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS 67 707-4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 67 707-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 67 708. MILLING OPERATIONS 68 SECTION IV V Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications 708-1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 68 708-2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 68 708-3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 69 708-4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 69 708-5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 69 708-6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 69 708-7. TYPES OF MILLING 69 708-8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 69 708-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 70 708-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 70 800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND MARKINGS 71 801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 71 801-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 71 802. SIGNING AND MARKING 71 802-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 72 803. ROADWAY LIGHTING 72 803-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 72 900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION 73 901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 73 902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 73 902-1. IRRIGATION 73 902-2. LANDSCAPE 83 903. SODDING 97 904. SEEDING 98 905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 98 905-1. SCOPE 98 905-2. SCHEDULING OF WORK 99 905-3. WORK METHODS 99 906. LEVEL OF SERVICE 101 907. COMPLETION OF WORK 101 908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 101 909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 102 910. TREE PROTECTION 102 910-1. TREE BARRICADES 102 910-2. ROOT PRUNING 103 910-3. PROPER TREE PRUNING 104 SECTION IV VI Updated 3/5/2018 1 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 100 SERIES: GENERAL 101. SCOPE OF WORK Project Name: Marshall Street and Northeast WRF Alum Feed System Upgrades Project Number: 16 -0012 -UT Scope of Work: This project will upgrade the existing alum feed systems at the Marshall Street and Northeast Water Reclamation Facilities (WRF). Marshall Street WRF: The work at the Marshall Street WRF includes the phased demolition of the existing interior alum feed system such that the existing feed system remains operational during the upgrade. Demolition includes removal ofthree existing fiberglass alum tanks and their concrete bases, cutting an opening in the facilities concrete/CMU wall for placement of new fiberglass tanks, removal of the existing alum feed pumps and existing electrical connections. Demolition of an adjacent unused lime slaking structure is also included. The new installation will include two (2) new fiberglass alum tanks, PVC piping, associated concrete bases, floor repairs and a short length of concrete pipe trench. A new modular alum pump skid, tank level gauges, eye wash stations and SCADA integration are also included. Once installed the concrete wall will be replaced and finished in kind. Northeast WRF: The work at the Northeast WRF includes the construction of a covered outdoor containment structure with pipe trenches, installation of two (2) new fiberglass alum tanks, modular alum pump skid with stand, PVC piping, power, lighting, level sensors, SCADA integration, eyewash stations, sump pump and stand for the City's existing tote based chemical feed (Micro C) as detailed on contract drawings and specifications. Once the new system is operating the existing polyethylene storage tank and pumps are to be demolished. The Contractor shall provide a copy of a current Contractor License/Registration with the state of Florida and Pinellas County. These documents must be included in the bid proposal package. Failure to provide these documents in the bid proposal will deem the contractor's bid as non- responsive. The Contractor shall provide 1 Fixed project signs as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required at no additional cost to the Owner due to the Contractor's schedule of work. Contract Period: 180 Consecutive Calendar Days SECTION IV Page 1 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 102. FIELD ENGINEERING 102-1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the State of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 102-1.1. GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Professional Land Surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. 102-1.2. LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 102-2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY If line and grade is supplied by the City, at the completion of all work the Contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 103. DEFINITION OF TERMS For the Purpose of these Technical Specifications, the Definition of Terms from Section III, Article 1 - Definitions of these Contract Documents shall apply. SECTION IV Page 2 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the Contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 103-1. REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. The most stringent specification prevails in the case where more than one specification is referenced for the same task. Contractor shall utilize applicable FDOT Standards and Specifications for tasks that are not covered by City's Standards and Specifications. 104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 105. AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 105-1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of pre -construction conditions. 105-2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 105-3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio/video recording shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre -construction color audio/video recording documentation. SECTION IV Page 3 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 105-4. EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio/video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio/video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 105-5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 105-6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during video playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. 105-7. VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the video viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed by the Contractor in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed ten feet (10'). The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 105-8. LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No videoing shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to SECTION IV Page 4 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 105-9. SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within the construction area's zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during videoing shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. 105-10. VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videos shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by video number and project title. Each video shall have a log of that video's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 105-11. AREA OF COVERAGE Video coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 105-12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 106. STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is prohibited. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum oftwenty-four (24) hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 107-1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard SECTION IV Page 5 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 107-2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. This plan shall be reviewed and approved by City Traffic Operations personnel regardless if MOT plan details are included in the contract plans. 107-2.1. WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety are to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation they will be facing as the driver proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. Per the 2014 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 or latest revision: "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved pedestrian longitudinal channelizing devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and marked detours shall be provided by appropriate signs." Per the 2014 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction or latest revision FDOT Design Standards (DS): 102-5 Traffic Control, 102-5.1 Standards, are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans. 107-3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increases with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local SECTION IV Page 6 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season without prior approval by the City Engineer. 107-3.1. ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County or Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 107-3.1.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 107-3.2. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic Division staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 107-3.2.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of seven (7) day notice period prior to road closure and potentially longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 107-3.3. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 107-3.3.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C -View Release 107-3.4. MAJOR ARTERIALS 107-3.4.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than seven (7) days. 107-4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone (727) 562-4747, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. SECTION IV Page 7 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 107-5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 107-6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise. 107-7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a twenty-four (24) hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a twenty-four (24) hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 108-1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines, the Contractor shall utilize one of the following options: Option 1 - Having the power lines de -energized and visibly grounded. SECTION IV Page 8 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Option 2 - Maintaining a minimum distance of twenty feet (20') of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV and fifty feet (50') of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV. Option 3 - Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the following table. 108-2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES VOLTAGE (nominal, kV, alternating current) MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE (feet) Up to 50 10 Over 50 to 200 15 Over 200 to 350 20 Over 350 to 500 25 Over 500 to 750 35 Over 750 to 1,000 45 Over 1,000 (as established by the utility owner/operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and distribution) Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including 200kV. 109. PROJECT WEB PAGES 109-1. WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 109-2. WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/ SECTION IV Page 9 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications http://www.section508.gov/ In particular, use of variable -width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 109-3. THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by City departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from Public Communications. 109-4. MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 109-5. INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow the Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 109-6. POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different server than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. 109-7. WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed, Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. SECTION IV Page 10 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 200 SERIES: SITEWORK 201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The Contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The Contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the Contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify their Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff is required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the Contractor. City staff, in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements, is to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform to OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the Contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The construction quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract do not contain sufficient quantities to allow the Contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench -shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than four hundred feet (400') of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be a minimum of six inches (6") wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. SECTION IV Page 11 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 202. OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 203. DEWATERING 203-1. GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The Contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. Contractor shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this Contractor may be required to divert the water to a suitable place of discharge as may be determined by the Engineer. Where possible, Contractor may contain produced groundwater on the project site, a dewatering plan must be submitted to the City for approval if a discharge permit is not obtained or required. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per linear foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 203-2. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 203-2.1. DEWATERING DISCHARGE The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting the Notice of Intent to use the Generic Permit for the Discharge of Groundwater from Dewatering Operations and associated fee in accordance with Florida DEP Requirements, F.A.C. 62-621.300(2)(b) prior to discharging of produced groundwater into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to construction, a dewatering plan must be prepared and submitted to the City for review. It shall include site-specific notes and details presenting the Contractor's proposed dewatering and disposal methods. The City will field -inspect the dewatering operation throughout construction. SECTION IV Page 12 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated from under pipes, structures and roadways and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off-site at their expense. The limits and depths of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. 204-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of clean fill placed as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. Included in the cost of cubic yards of suitable material placed is the removal, hauling and disposal of unsuitable material. 204-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems, Slurry Pipe Lines and Potable Water SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER Reclaimed Water, Irrigation and Slurry Lines SECTION IV Page 13 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications WHITE Proposed Excavation PINK Temporary Survey Markings Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be six inch (6") x three inch (3") and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be four inch (4") x two inch (2") and be placed on the curb face. 206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 206-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 206-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 207-1. GENERAL Erosion and sediment control shall conform to the requirements of the FDOT Standard Specifications for Prevention, Control, and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution. Contractor shall use temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater Standard Indices. 207-2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) Florida Stormwater, Erosion, and Sedimentation Control Inspector Training & Certification. All personnel working on the Project shall complete illicit discharge training once per calendar year. Contractor shall provide documentation to the City prior to Notice To Proceed. Example of training and SECTION IV Page 14 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications training sign -in sheet will be provided by the City to the Contractor at the Pre -Construction Meeting. 207-3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other temporary vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 207-4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 207-5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) or the City of Clearwater Standard Indices, or equals approved by the City Engineer before installation. 207-6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 207-7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: no more than 400 linear feet of trench shall be open at any one time; and, wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 207-8. MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. SECTION IV Page 15 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 207-9. COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order". 208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES. Other beach erosion control structures, accompanied by a certified survey showing the location of the groin or other beach erosion control structure and adjoining groins or other beach erosion control structures, shall be presented to the city council for final approval. Where steps are necessary to provide access along the beach to the public, then such steps shall be shown as part of the plan for groin construction prior to issuance of the permit, and such steps shall be constructed and maintained in a safe condition at all times. 208-1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS Existing seawalls and revetments on natural waterbodies may be replaced with a revetment or with a vertical seawall with the provision of rip rap placed at the base of the wall up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall. Revetments and seawalls may be replaced with a vertical seawall in manmade waterbodies, provided that the seawall is within the property line and maintains the established shoreline. 208-2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION The top of cap elevation for all replacement and new seawalls and seawall caps shall not exceed 4.8 feet N.A.V.D. If the top of a seawall cap is constructed at an elevation differing from the adjacent property owner top of cap elevation by greater than one foot, then a return wall is required to sufficiently provide for the break in grade at the property line. Seawalls exceeding 4.8 feet N.A.V.D. in height prior to the effective date of this article may be maintained, repaired and replaced to their current height. 208-3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL Seawalls and revetments located seaward of the coastal construction setback line are controlled by regulations of the Division of Beaches and Shores of the Florida Department of Environmental Protection. Replacement of a seawall or revetment that is located seaward of the coastal construction setback line necessitates submission of a permit application to the state department of environmental protection. 208-4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL The placement of a new seawall waterward of an existing seawall is permitted, subject to the following conditions: (a) A Florida registered professional engineer must certify the new seawall design. (b) The new seawall shall not extend more than 18 inches from the waterward face of the original alignment of the existing vertical seawall location. SECTION IV Page 16 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications (c) The new seawall shall be placed vertically plumb. (d) Placing a seawall in front of an existing seawall shall only be permitted once unless the seawall behind the new seawall is removed. (e) Existing seawall sections that interfere with new seawall location shall be removed. (0 The new seawall shall include an adequate closure of gaps at each property line. (g) For zoning purposes, the setbacks for the property will be measured from either the property line or the waterside of the original seawall slab, whichever is more restrictive, and will not be adjusted to accommodate the new seawall addition. For purposes of pier construction, the shore normal dimensions will be measured from the waterside of the original seawall slab. 208-5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY Prior to final inspection and approval of a new or replacement seawall or seawall cap, a post - construction survey shall be required. Repairs of existing seawalls and seawall caps which do not alter the height or location shall not be subject to this requirement. 208-6. RIP -RAP On all natural waterways, an apron of rip -rap shall be placed at the base of all new and repaired seawalls up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall to absorb the wave energy and protect the underlying soft earth or sand from being carried away, as well as to provide habitat for desirable marine species. This rip -rap shall be required at the base of all new seawalls and at the time that an existing seawall is repaired where the replacement constitutes greater than 50 percent of the entire length of the seawall or includes the replacement of a panel. 208-7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL A retaining wall may be built as an alternative to a vertical seawall, provided that all activities, including dredging, filling, slope grading, or equipment access and similar activities and all portions of the wall are located landward of the mean high water line. SECTION IV Page 17 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 300 SERIES: MATERIALS 301. CONCRETE The Contractor shall notify the Construction Inspector or City a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all concrete placement. Unless otherwise noted elsewhere or directed, the following requirements shall be adhered to: All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at twenty-eight (28) days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of three inches (3") to five inches (5"), except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than five cubic yards (5 cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding five cubic yards (5 cy), one set of three (3) compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 302-1. EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point six inches (6") outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. 302-2. FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal, except curbs. Curb forms shall be metal only, unless at radius, intermittent sections less than ten (10) linear feet or by written permission from Engineer. They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 303. REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements ofAASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements ofAASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Welded wires shall SECTION IV Page 18 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 1 1 SECTION IV - Technical Specifications be elevated by the use of chairs. Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM A775/A77 Irequirements. 303-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 1 Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 1 304. BACKFILL I 304-1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL Material for backfill other than under Gabion mattress shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall I be granular, free from clay, muck, organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than three inches (3") in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. 1 Material for backfill under Gabion mattress shall be an A-1 soil meeting AASHTO M145. Backfill shall be carried up evenly in layer not exceeding eight inches (8") in thickness and shall I be compacted into place by mechanical tamping before the next layer is applied. A hydro -hammer shall not be used for compaction. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to twelve inches (12") above the I pipe by tamping or other suitable means. For backfill in small areas that do not permit any type of tamping, Contractor may use flowable fill to achieve required density. Flowable fill shall adhere to Section 121 of FDOT specifications. 1 Where wet conditions are such that dewatering by normal pumping methods would not be effective, as determined by the Engineer, Contractor may use #57 stone (meeting FDOT's specifications) and hand tamping until backfill has reached an elevation and condition such as to Imake the use of the mechanical tampers practical. Fully wrap the stones with a layer of Type D filter fabric of FDOT Index 199. Do not place stones within four feet (4') of the ends of trench or ditch; use normally accepted backfill material at the ends. IWhere new cast -in-place concrete work is performed, do not place backfill until the specified twenty-eight (28) days compressive strength occurs. I Do not allow heavy construction equipment to cross over pipes or culverts until placing and compacting backfill material to the finished earthwork grade or to an elevation of at least four feet (4') above the top of the pipe or culvert. 1 The cost of backfill, flowable fill, alternative approved material for wet conditions, and extra dewatering effort to achieve required density, etc., shall be included in the contract unit price or lump sum price for the item of the work specified. I 304-2. TESTING AND INSPECTION I Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory, approved by the Owner, to perform density testing on backfilled material. All testing shall be witnessed by ISECTION IV Page 19 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications the Owner's Representative. The test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. The Contractor shall be charged for all retests and re -inspection services. Backfill under all type of impervious areas and around structures: Backfill in these areas shall be compacted to a minimum of 98% Modified Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D 1557 or ASSHTO T 180. Tests shall be performed up to the proposed bottom of pavement elevation. Backfill outside of impervious areas: Backfill in these areas shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% Standard Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D-698 or AASHTO T-99. Tests shall be performed up to the proposed finished grade. Backfill Testing: The Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of backfill compaction by performing density testing. For each test location, density testing shall be performed at eight inch (8") lifts. The character of the backfill material will be observed during the excavation for density testing to determine conformance with the specifications. Density testing shall be performed using nuclear field density equipment or conventional weight -volume methods. If the weight -volume method is used, volume shall be determined by using the sand replacement test (ASTM D 1556) or liquid displacement methods (ASTM D 2167). If nuclear methods are used, the trench correction effect shall be accounted for by recalibrating the nuclear gauge on its calibration block at the location of each test prior to taking the density measurement. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, tools, and labor to prepare the test site for testing. Normal Testing Frequency: One test shall be performed for each one hundred feet (100') of backfill or fraction thereof or for each single run of pipe/culvert connecting two (2) successive structures whichever is less. The location of the test within each section shall be selected by the Owner's Representative. Testing shall progress as each one hundred foot (100') section is completed. Four (4) tests equally spaced around each structure shall be performed on each eight inch (8") lift. Testing which indicates that unacceptable material has been incorporated into the backfill, or that insufficient compaction is being obtained shall be followed by expanded testing to determine the limits of the unacceptable backfill. Expanded Testing Requirements: If normal testing within a testing section indicates unacceptable backfill, the Owner's Representative may require additional testing within the same test section to determine the limits of unacceptable backfill. Additional testing required by the Owner's Representative shall be paid for by the Contractor and shall not exceed testing of four (4) additional locations within the test section. Unacceptable backfill within the limits established by the testing shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Additional testing beyond that required may be performed by the Contractor at his expense to further delineate limits of unacceptable backfill. 305. RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 305-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the dry weight in tons. SECTION IV Page 20 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 305-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand -cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand -cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap. SECTION IV Page 21 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER 401. SANITARY MANHOLES 401-1. BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches (24"). Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches (24"). Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire interior and exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch (1/2") of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 401-2. PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of five inches (5"). The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from Contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. SECTION IV Page 22 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five inches (5") thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 401-2.1. MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 703-7, Asphaltic Concrete — Adjustment of Manholes. 401-3. DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 401-4. FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Index 301. 401-5. MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a 15 mil dry thickness of Sherwin Williams Targuard® Coal Tar Epoxy or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or PP -R Liner with a minimum thickness of two millimeters (2 mm). 401-6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by NPC Kor-N-Seal® or approved water stop coupling. 402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 402-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. SECTION IV Page 23 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 403-1. MATERIALS 403-1.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than ten feet (10') of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of twenty feet (20'). Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in these Technical Specifications Article 501. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 403-1.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy lined in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 403-2. INSTALLATION 403-2.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of Thermoplastic gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus eight inches (8") to twelve inches (12") on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. SECTION IV Page 24 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the Contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (one half inch (1/2") diameter aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint two (2) feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The Contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 403-2.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 403-3. TESTING 403-3.1. TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed fifty (50) gallons per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at their own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any dips or sags of more than five percent (5%) of the inside pipe diameter dimension shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 403-3.2. TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. SECTION IV Page 25 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 403-4. BASIS OF PAYMENT 403-4.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per linear foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per linear foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 403-4.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Article 501 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 404. HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 404-1. INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of eight inch (8") to twelve inch (12") sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 404-2. PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive track record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 404-3. MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have SECTION IV Page 26 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at five (5) foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of fifty (50) years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Any liner system must be approved by the Engineer prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than fourteen (14) days prior to the date for receiving bids. 404-4. CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. SECTION IV Page 27 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 404-5. TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected with a digital camera and recorded in DVD format as specified below. 404-5.1. VIDEO, PHOTO CAPTURE AND DATA COLLECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR MANHOLE AND PIPELINE INSPECTION This section describes the requirements of the Contractor in providing the following minimum requirements for Video, Photo Capture and Database structure to the City. The City is currently using CUES Granite XP video and data collection software. The Contractor shall provide the TV Inspections in the same Granite XP database, photo and video capture format. The Contractor - provided TV Inspections, Database, DVDs, Photos and related files shall have the ability to direct synchronize to the City's existing Granite XP database. 404-5.2. IMAGE (PHOTOS) CAPTURE FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS The Inspection image files (pictures) shall have the ability to export to Industry Standard Formats to include JPEG, BMP, and TIFF formats and be transferable by disk, DVD and/or external hard drive to an external personal computer utilizing standard viewers and printers. 404-5.3. DIGITAL VIDEO FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS Digital video files (Inspection Videos) shall be captured and/or recorded in the MPEG 1, 2 or 4 format or as specified by the City. The Video capture files shall be in MPEG format with data linking (Inspection Observations) to the database file(s). The "Link" of the video capture file to the database observation file is required. The inspection observation(s) shall link to the video record in real-time. The accompanying database shall support the following code systems: WRc, PACP, CUES standard, or current code system being utilized by the City. The Database and Software program (Granite XP V2.X) shall be able to import asset data from an ArcGIS (City current version) geo- database file utilizing the network features to associate Sewer Mains with corresponding Sewer Nodes. The database structure shall retain information on the various structures found within a sewer or storm system. It is important that the structures, nodes, manholes and pipe identifiers and related attribute information be retained as separate tables from the Inspection allowing import of existing data from multiple sources. The data structure allows different projects to reside within a single database. Information gathered in projects shall be available to view by project or by system. Data gathered during project inspection shall be available to view by the selected structure. Therefore, all inspections can be viewed on a structure even if gathered in different projects. 404-5.4. SYNCHRONIZATION The database shall have the ability to synch assets and inspections from replicated databases. The synch process should have built-in error checking for duplicates, updates and any modifications to SECTION IV Page 28 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications the data being synched. This allows for multiple sources of data to be effectively consolidated into a single unitary database for analysis and evaluation. 404-6. LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at their expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 404-7. LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 404-8. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight (8) hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 404-9. PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per linear foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc., to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. SECTION IV Page 29 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 405-1. SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made -in-place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 405-2. PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. The cost of such work shall be included in the pay item, per linear foot of liner. 405-3. FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 405-3.1. MATERIALS 405-3.1.1. LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The Contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 405-3.1.2. MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two (2) and three (3) parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 405-3.1.3. GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four (4) bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. SECTION IV Page 30 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 405-3.2. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertical as possible. Pour six inches (6") of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe water tightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, refer to Standard Detail Index 104, "Street and Driveway Replacement for Concrete and Asphaltic Concrete Surfaces". 405-4. STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum one half inch (1/2") thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. SECTION IV Page 31 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a two (2) coat application. 405-4.1. MATERIALS 405-4.1.1. PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +1- 5 pcf 405-5. INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 405-6. GROUTING MIX Strong -Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacturer's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 250 psi and a one (1) day strength of 50 psi. 405-7. LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at twenty-eight (28) days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Project site. Bag weight shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be one - SECTION IV Page 32 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications half inch (1/2") to five-eighths inch (5/8") long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the unmixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65% to 75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 to 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of 0.67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than one-half inch (1/2") in length nor greater than five-eighths inch (5/8") in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two (2) coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure a minimum of one-half inch (1/2") thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 405-8. WATER Shall be clean and potable. 405-9. OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 405-10. EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. SECTION IV Page 33 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 405-11. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 405-11.1. PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 405-11.2. MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for thirty (30) seconds to one (1) minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 405-11.3. SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be fifteen (15) minutes to one (1) hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of one-half inch (1/2"). The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than twenty-four (24) hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produced from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than one-half inch (1/2"). The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. SECTION IV Page 34 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 405-11.4. PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) two inch (2") cubes may be prepared each day or from every fifty (50) bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 405-11.5. CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. 405-11.6. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10") of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine inches (9"). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty-eight inch (48") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty inch diameter (60"), and ninety (90) seconds for seventy-two inch (72") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 405-12. INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 405-12.1. SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration. 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam -injected through wall of manhole to fill voids, and/or b. Hydrophilic gel -injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of one-half inch (1/2") 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of thirty (30) dry mils SECTION IV Page 35 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 405-12.2. MATERIALS 405-12.2.1. REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1-3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 405-12.2.2. HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86 Bonding Strength 250-300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574 Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412 Elongation 250% ASTM D-3574 Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D-1042 Toxicity Non Toxic 405-12.2.3. WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components -two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for SECTION IV Page 36 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications approximately six (6) months. Upon completion, the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM C882 Modified 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 380 psi (2.62 MPa) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) 8.1x10-10 cm/sec to 7.6x10"-11 cm/sec at 100% RH at 50% RH 405-12.2.4. CEMENT LINING A self -bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze -Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4 - 5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after twenty-four (24) hours moist curing at 68 degrees Fahrenheit. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one (1) pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch (1/2"), but no greater than two inches (2"). It will have a dark grey color. 405-12.2.5. EPDXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of thirty (30) dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees Fahrenheit: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray SECTION IV Page 37 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10 —20 Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 405-12.2.6. CHEMICAL RESISTANCE The sanitary sewer liner shall be resistant to: Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others. 405-12.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 405-12.3.1. PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client.) 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four (24) hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 405-12.3.2. PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines (where feasible) or inserting protective screens. SECTION IV Page 38 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 405-12.3.3. STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization. 405-12.3.4. INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill five-eighths inch (5/8") holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 405-12.3.5. WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. 405-12.3.6. CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (1/2") (and no more than two inches (2")) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a twenty-four (24) hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 405-12.3.7. EPDXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least thirty (30) mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. SECTION IV Page 39 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 405-12.3.8. CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 405-12.3.9. MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10") of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine inches (9"). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for a forty eight inch (48") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy-two inch (72") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 405-12.3.10. WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. SECTION IV Page 40 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE LINES AND APPURTENANCES 501. SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, fire lines, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. 502. MATERIALS 502-1. GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 502-2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 502-2.1. DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AW WA C 104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. SECTION IV Page 41 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION W —Technical Specifications Ductile iron pipe shall be used for all hydrant installations and for fire line installations from the main to the backflow preventer. 502-2i. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe four inch (4") through eight inch (8") shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than eight inch (8") shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes four inch (4") through eight inch (8") when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of four inch (4") and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated twelve (12) gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about eighteen inches (18") between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a two inch (2") PVC pipe to twelve inches (12") minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The two inch (2") PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the two inch (2") PVC pipe shall be plugged with a two inch (2") removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 502-2.3. FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from four inch (4") through sixteen inch (16") in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSUAWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSUAWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with requirements of ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSUAWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSUAWWA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV Page 42 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 1 1 1 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 502-2.4. RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 502-2.5. PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 502-3. GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be hand wheel operated with rising stems. Valves four inches (4") and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with two inch (2") square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, non -shock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch (2") diameter and smaller are not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch (3") diameter are not allowed. Gate Valves, four inch (4") to sixteen inch (16") diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSIIA.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0 -ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body. Gate valves larger than sixteen inches (16") shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI/AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped SECTION IV Page 43 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by-pass. 502-4. VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be three-piece valve box assemblies. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. 502-5. HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B -84-B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AW WA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and must be UL/FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an 0 -ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately two inches (2") above the ground line. Breakaway bolts are not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 one and a half inch (1-1/2") pentagon nut. SECTION IV Page 44 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, one quarter (1/4) turn type with 0 -ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0 - rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a six inch (6") Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a five and one quarter inch (5-1/4") valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) two and one half inch (2-1/2") hose nozzles and one (1) four and one half inch (4-1/2") pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Restrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Restrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. 502-6. SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to four inch (4") P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on four inch (4") main shall be one and one half inch (1-1/2"). Service saddles shall be used on all two inch (2") service connections to six inch (6") and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 502-7. TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. SECTION IV Page 45 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 502-8. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, and when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customer's private system. The types of devices allowed are: 1. Double Check Valve Assembly - a device composed of two (2) single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the water tightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device - a device containing a minimum of two (2) independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 502-9. TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith -Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and three-quarter inch (3/4") bronze test plug. 502-10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 503. CONSTRUCTION 503-1. MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. SECTION IV Page 46 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at their expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 503-2. PIPE LAYING 503-2.1. ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of thirty inches (30") and a maximum of forty-two inches (42") below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. 503-2.2. INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into the pipe, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the SECTION IV Page 47 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of ten percent (10%) or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems, or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSUAWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. 503-3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 503-3.1. GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 503-3.2. VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed eighteen inches (18") from the main line. The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 503-3.3. HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located ten feet (10') of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 4 of 4 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall SECTION IV Page 48 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 1 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's 1 Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a six inch (6") ductile iron branch controlled by ' an independent six inch (6") gate valve. If hydrant is placed greater than ten feet (10') from the main, an additional valve shall be installed at the hydrant and shall be included in the hydrant assembly cost. 503-3.4. ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by 1 attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturer's recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant run out length precludes the use 1 of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on ' the plans. 503-4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ' Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and ' the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater. 1 504. TESTS 504-1. HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service ' taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AW WA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any ' hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at their expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. SECTION IV Page 49 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 1 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 504-2. NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative forty-eight (48) hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 505. STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. 505-1. STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification O -S -602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron". 505-2. FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. 505-3. STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than twenty-four (24) hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. 505-4. RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 505-5. BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. SECTION IV Page 50 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 506. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 506-1. GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and/or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joint materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 506-2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 506-2.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 506-2.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains completely and ready for operation. SECTION IV Page 51 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV—Technical Specifications 506-3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 506-3.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 506-3.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 506-4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 506-4.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 506-4.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 506-5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 506-5.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Article 501-2.5 of these Technical Specifications. No exceptions. 506-5.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant completely including necessary thrust anchorage, six inch (6") pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. SECTION IV Page 52 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 600 SERIES: STORMWATER 601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 601-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 602. UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub -surface drainage pipe as directed in the Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non -degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be eight inches (8") in diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffitess of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in FDOT Section 948-1.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe that exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non -perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly -chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. Filter aggregate for underdrains shall be as specified in the FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 901 — Course Aggregate, and shall be either #6 or #57. If #57 is used, it must be washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag, or crushed gravel. 602-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of linear feet of eight inch (8") Sub -drain in place and accepted. SECTION IV Page 53 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 602-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per linear foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 603. STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be steel reinforced concrete unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 430 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 603-1. TESTING AND INSPECTION The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a watertight sewer under all conditions. The work under this Article shall include the internal video recording of new stormwater drainage pipes and drainage structures. The Contractor shall provide the City with a video of the completed stormwater drainage system, and a written report. The Contractor shall pump down and clean the pipes and drainage structures, to the satisfaction of the City, prior to video recording. The video shall be of the standard DVD format, in color, with all the pertinent data and observations recorded as audio on the DVD. The data should include: 1) An accurate recorded footage of the pipe lengths. 2) The drainage structure number and pipe size. 3) The run of the pipe and direction of flow (i.e. from S-1 to S-2). 4) Details of structural defects, broken pipes, sags, dips, misalignments, obstructions and infiltration. The written report shall include the four (4) items listed previously. All visual and video recording inspections shall be completed by the Contractor and be in accordance with Section 430-4.8 of FDOT Standard Specifications. Any deficient or damaged pipe discovered during the video recording process shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair or replace at their own expense within the contractual duration. SECTION IV Page 54 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications As a complement to the video report, the Contractor shall also provide digital photos of areas of concern in electronic (computer CD/DVD) and hard copy form (in color). All known pipe breaks or those breaks discovered after the video inspection shall be repaired by the Contractor regardless of the test allowances. Faulty sections of drainage pipes or drainage structures rejected by the Engineer shall be removed and re-laid by the Contractor. Sections of pipe that are repaired, re-laid or replaced shall be accompanied with a corresponding post construction video inspection at the Contractor's expense. In all cases that a leak is found, re -inspection shall be required at the Contractor's expense, to confirm that the problem has been resolved. 603-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, gravel bedding if needed for stabilization, labor and incidentals, etc.). 604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Index Numbers 201 to 231. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Articles 301, 302, 303 and 202, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 604-1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Built up type manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on Index Numbers 201. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with grout. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with a skim coat of one half inch (1/2") of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. SECTION IV Page 55 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 604-2. PRECAST TYPE Precast manholes shall be constructed as shown on Index 202. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches (5") thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturer's option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. 604-3. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 605-1. MATERIAL 605-1.1. PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES 605-1.1.1. GABION & MATTRESS BASKETS Gabion and mattress baskets units shall conform to ASTM A975, be of non -raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.106 inches. 605-1.1.2. PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 Y2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.134 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.174 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener SECTION IV Page 56 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. 605-1.1.3. GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. Crushed concrete shall not be used for filler material. 605-1.1.4. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 985. 605-2. PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. SECTION IV Page 57 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than twelve inches (12") into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. In wet conditions, a base shall be established by spreading and compacting #57 stone prior to placement of geotextile fabric and gabions or mattresses. SECTION IV Page 58 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS 701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum eight inches (8") compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus two inches (2"), if over six inches (6"), and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T-180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per linear foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All necessary restoration exceeding this footprint will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per linear foot; sidewalk four inches (4") or six inches (6") thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of six inches (6") thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 303 and 707). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 702-1. BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 101 "Scope of Work" of the City's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be eight inches (8") compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be twelve inches (12") compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is SECTION IV Page 59 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the City's Technical Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. Shell Base: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. Limerock Base: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. Crushed Concrete Base: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 100. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the City by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. Superpave Asphalt Base: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 234 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 5. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement Base: Reclaimed asphalt pavement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 283 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. As per FDOT Section 283, RAP material shall be used as a base course only on non -limited access paved shoulders, shared use paths, or other non -traffic bearing applications. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. SECTION IV Page 60 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 702-1.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 702-1.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 702-2. SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 204 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the City's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value of the subgrade after the materials are mixed for the stabilized subgrade. 702-2.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per Section 160-7.2 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 702-2.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. SECTION IV Page 61 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 703-1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 703-1.1. AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 915 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703-1.2. BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703-2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per FDOT's Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per FDOT's Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of 1/4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least twenty-five feet (25') from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per FDOT's Standard Specifications. In addition, for excesses of one-quarter inch (1/2") or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. SECTION IV Page 62 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 703-3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs, acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Sections 330 and 334 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 703-4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Type SP/Spec 334-1 Type FC/Spec 337-8 Type B/Spec 234-8 ATPB/287-8 703-5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, Quality Control Testing, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703-6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 703-6.1. CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 703-6.2. POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1 All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. SECTION IV Page 63 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 703-7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc., will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 703-8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped SECTION IV Page 64 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications with its own water supply for pre -wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be one-quarter inch (1/4") above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 703-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 703-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than ten percent (10%) from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http://www.dot.state.fl.us/construction/fuel&bit/fuel&bit.shtm. For additional information, call FDOT at (850) 414-4252. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. SECTION IV Page 65 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing asphalt driveways that must be altered for project construction shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six inches (6"). Remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street. Use Article 703 Asphaltic Concrete, of these Technical Specifications, as specified for the street paving. When the finished surface of the existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Asphalt Driveways. 705-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Asphalt Driveways in place and accepted. 705-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Asphalt Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 706. CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed ten feet (10'). In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 301, 302 and 303 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 706-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be linear feet of curb in place and accepted. 706-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. SECTION IV Page 66 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 707-1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every five feet (5'). Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical Specifications shall also apply. 707-2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six inches (6') in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four feet (4') measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of Articles 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical Specifications shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 707-3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS The contractor is responsible for constructing ADA compliant concrete curb ramps per the plans and installing detectable warning surfaces on said ramps as called for in the plan set. Concrete curb ramps and detectable warning surfaces are to be constructed per FDOT Standards and Specifications. 707-4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of four inch (4") concrete sidewalk, six inch (6") concrete sidewalk, and six inch (6") concrete driveways in place and accepted. 707-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. SECTION IV Page 67 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 708. MILLING OPERATIONS 708-1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify the City of Clearwater Project Representative a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all milling. 708-2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the Contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven (7) days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre -wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. SECTION IV Page 68 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 708-3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified, all salvageable materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the City Project Representative to schedule delivery of material at least 48 hours prior to starting work. 708-4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 708-5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All private utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. City -owned utilities and structures shall be located by the Owner/City and adjusted by the contractor. The Contractor shall arrange their schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 708-6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 703-7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 708-7. TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot (6') wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. 708-8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately fifty (50) to one hundred (100) feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. SECTION IV Page 69 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 708-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 708-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. SECTION IV Page 70 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND MARKINGS 801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LEDs and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is prohibited unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. All damaged inductive loop detectors shall be restored by the contractor per FDOT Index 17781. 801-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 802. SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. SECTION IV Page 71 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications The Contractor is responsible for restoring all striping in paint and reflective beading per the FDOT indices mentioned above. The City's Traffic Engineering department shall follow up with thermoplastic striping at a later date unless otherwise specified. 802-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 803. ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 803-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. SECTION IV Page 72 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION 901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The Contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The Contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the Contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's Water Reclamation Facilities, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the Water Reclamation Facilities will be coordinated at the pre -construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 902-1. IRRIGATION 902-1.1. DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 902-1.1.1. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. SECTION IV Page 73 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the Contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders, with three rings, containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the Contractor's address and business telephone number, twenty- four (24) hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. 902-1.1.2. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation of twenty-four inch (24") diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 902-1.1.3. WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater. SECTION IV Page 74 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV—Technical Specifications 902-1.2. PRODUCTS 902-1.2.1. GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 902-1.2.2. PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 902-1.2.3. PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 902-1.2.4. PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 902-1.2.5. THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 902-1.2.6. GATE VALVES 902-1.2.6.1. MANUAL GATE VALVES TWO INCHES (2") AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded -Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non -Shock Safe -T -Shear Stem 5. Safe -T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal. SECTION IV Page 75 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902-1.2.6.2. GATE VALVES TWO AND A HALF INCHES (2'/2') AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA-C-509 2. 2001b. O.W.G. 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with two inch (2") square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve three inches (3") and larger. The "street key" shall be five feet (5') long with a two inch (2") square operating nut. 902-1.2.7. SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 902-1.2.8. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance -pressure across -the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a one inch (1") (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch (1") slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. 902-1.2.9. VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 ten inch (10") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. SECTION IV Page 76 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek # 182001 (6") economy turf box with # 182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 902-1.2.10. DRIP IRRIGATION 902-1.2.10.1. CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 902-1.2.10.2.OPE RATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be seven inch (7"). B. For on -surface or under mulch installations, six inch (6") metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed three feet (3') to five feet (5') on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 902-1.2.10.3.LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub -surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 902-1.2.10.4.AIRNACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an AirNacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 902-1.2.10.5. PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressure of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within +/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high -impact SECTION IV Page 77 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 902-1.2.10.6. FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 902-1.2.10.7. FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 902-1.2.11. AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three (3) independent programs with eight (8) start times each, station run time capability from one (1) minute to twelve (12) hours in one (1) minute increments, and a seven (7) day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 902-1.2.12. FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery. SECTION IV Page 78 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 902-1.2.13. LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES -B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 902-1.3. EXECUTION 902-1.3.1. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in Contractor's absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Specifications. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In the event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. SECTION IV Page 79 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 902-1.3.2. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 902-1.3.2.1. TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain six inch (6") horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain six inch (6") vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 902-1.3.2.2. BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have eighteen inches (18") of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than one half inch ('/2"). C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Standard Specifications. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six inches (6") thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 902-1.3.2.3. ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non -pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. SECTION IV Page 80 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 902-1.3.3. INSTALLATION 902-1.3.3.1. WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 902-1.3.3.2. ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Specifications. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 902-1.3.3.3. SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 902-1.3.3.4. PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least fifteen (15) minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. SECTION IV Page 81 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four (4) hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least twenty- four (24) hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 902-1.3.3.5. CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineer's representative prior to installation. 902-1.3.3.6. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than six inches (6"), nor less than four inches (4") cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with twenty-four inch (24") minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, three feet (3') minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than seven feet (7') from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 902-1.3.3.7. GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. SECTION IV Page 82 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902-2. LANDSCAPE 902-2.1. GENERAL 902-2.1.1. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 902-2.1.2. SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Article. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Article shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 902-2.1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Article shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plans shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in their employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health SECTION IV Page 83 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Article. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call"/"Sunshine 811" at 8-1-1; "Sunshine 811" administrative offices may be reached at (800) 638-4097. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 902-2.1.4. SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two (2) copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one (1) year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 902-2.1.5. ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through their Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 902-2.1.6. ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C.T.: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. C. W: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SECTION IV Page 84 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST TR.: Straight trunk. MIN.: Minimum. GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. O.C.: On center, distance between plant centers. DIA.: Diameter. LVS.: Leaves. D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B&B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: Plants per pot. FG: Field grown. STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner's Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 902-2.1.7. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 902-2.1.7.1. PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container -grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. SECTION IV Page 85 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications C. Balled and burlapped ("B & B") plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than one foot (1') diameter of ball to every one inch (1") caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than two-thirds (2/3) of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of four (4) weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of twelve inches (12") of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within twenty-four (24) hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 902-2.1.8. JOB CONDITIONS 902-2.1.8.1. ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub -grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. SECTION IV Page 86 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to sod installation or seeding lawns. Protect existing lawn, trees, and promptly repair damages from planting operations. 902-2.1.8.2. SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc., in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representatives may request work stoppage in writing. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor, with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 902-2.1.8.3. UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 902-2.2. PRODUCTS 902-2.2.1. MATERIALS 902-2.2.1.1. PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc., shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Schedule. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 902-2.2.1.2. PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insects, pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided SECTION IV Page 87 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name, variety, size, quality, or designated area. E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit to the Landscape Architect proof of it being non -available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect, with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. L Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container -grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 902-2.2.1.3. GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious weed, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than twenty- four (24) hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. SECTION IV Page 88 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 902-2.2.1.4. MULCH A. Mulch shall be as specified in the plans or by the project manager. B. Install mulch to an even depth of three inches (3") before compaction, as shown in the PLANTING DETAILS in the plans. 902-2.2.1.5. FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grasses at the rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than one-fourth (1/4) the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). 902-2.2.1.6. STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over two inch (2") caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees two inch (2") caliper and under. A minimum of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of three (3) stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two — three-quarter inch (3/4") steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 902-2.2.1.7. PLANTING SOIL SECTION IV Page 89 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the City, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of one-third (1/3) peat and two-thirds (2/3) sandy loam, with no lumps over one inch (1"). C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under one (1) gallon container size shall consist of three inches (3") of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer six inches (6") to eight inches (8") into native soil. 902-2.2.1.8. SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra -Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 902-2.2.1.9. TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members six feet (6') to eight feet (8') on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot (1') for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH (four and one half feet)') above grade. 902-2.2.1.10. ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 902-2.2.1.11. PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 902-2.2.1.12. PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. SECTION IV Page 90 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 902-2.3. EXECUTION 902-2.3.1. PREPARATION 902-2.3.1.1. OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 902-2.3.1.2. GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre -emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round -Up" or "Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over one and one half inches (1%2") in any dimension from individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 902-2.3.1.3. PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread three inches (3") of one-third (1/3) Florida peat and two-thirds (2/3) sandy, or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer six inches (6") to eight inches (8") into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 902-2.3.1.4. PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS SECTION IV Page 91 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub - grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of four inches (4"). C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% to 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top four inches (4") of soil. E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 902-2.3.2. INSTALLATION 902-2.3.2.1. BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well - drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 902-2.3.2.2. LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc., as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an eighteen inch (18") (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the Plans. SECTION IV Page 92 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902-2.3.2.3. PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about one inch (1") higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each 1/2" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7 - 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back -filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 four inches (4") (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back -fill up to the proper grade. Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of eighteen inches (18") from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed -free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. 1. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. SECTION IV Page 93 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 902-2.3.2.4. SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one pound (1 lb.) of nitrogen per one thousand square feet (1000 sq ft). The ground shall be moistened before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to one inch (1") to one and one half inches (1-1/2") below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within two (2) hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of two inches (2") (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes 3:1 or steeper, and as required, a geotextile fabric shall be installed per manufacturer's specifications prior to placing sod. The sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 902-2.3.2.5. SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 902-2.3.2.6. TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of two (2) stakes per tree or an optional three (3) stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of four feet (4') height of stake above grade and a minimum of thirty inches (30") of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of three (3) stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of five (5) layers of burlap and five (5) - 2 SECTION IV Page 94 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two (2) three-quarter inch (3/4") steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of five feet (5') of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 902-2.3.2.7. MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. Mulch should be below top of curb and resistant to washout from stormwater run-off. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a three inch (3") layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum three inch (3") clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum six inch (6") clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum six inches (6") of non -mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. 902-2.3.2.8. PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 902-2.3.2.9. CLEAN-UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 902-2.3.2.10. PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. SECTION IV Page 95 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications C. The Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 902-2.3.2.11. REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by their operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by their work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 902-2.3.3. MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch (1") of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 902-2.3.4. INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 902-2.3.4.1. INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within fifteen (15) days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. 902-2.3.4.2. REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in the Plans and Specifications. SECTION IV Page 96 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within fifteen (15) days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 902-2.3.4.3. ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material, if any, have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from their Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or their representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under -specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 902-2.3.5. WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. 903. SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the Contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit SECTION IV Page 97 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than seventy- two (72) hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 904. SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 ib. of Rye Seed (to total 60 ib. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 905-1. SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the specified landscaped street areas including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; SECTION IV Page 98 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV — Technical Specifications • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 905-2. SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, such as cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. 905-3. WORK METHODS 905-3.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 905-3.2. DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The Contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 905-3.2.1. LITTER AND DEBRIS Remove trash and debris from the project site. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is the Contractor's responsibility. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The Contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the Contractor would be considered. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the Contractor. 905-3.2.2. VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within twenty-four (24) hours after providing the service. 905-3.2.3. PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular species. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while SECTION IV Page 99 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, consistent with the following specification: 905-3.2.3.1. PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; and remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation, such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 905-3.2.3.2. TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the Contractor, according to the approved Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 905-3.2.3.3. PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 905-3.2.4. PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 905-3.2.5. WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by Contractor at their expense. 905-3.2.6. MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually three inches (3"). 905-3.2.7. IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the system's proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. SECTION IV Page 100 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 905-3.2.8. LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 905-3.2.9. PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three (3) pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. 905-3.2.10. FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility. Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man- hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and Contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 906. LEVEL OF SERVICE The Project Site is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within seven (7) working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six (6) and no further than ten (10) calendar days apart. 907. COMPLETION OF WORK Within twenty-four (24) hours of completing work the City either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. 908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be SECTION IV Page 101 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications given forty-eight (48) hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a twelve (12) month period on plants, trees and palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as they feel appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. 3. All work shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or their employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs on the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required work to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 910. TREE PROTECTION 910-1. TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two-thirds (2/3) of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two inch (2") lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet (4') in length with a minimum of one foot (1') anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet (8') apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch (1") by four -inch (4") lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. SECTION IV Page 102 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 910-2. ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18") below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than eighteen inches (18") from existing grade. The City's Representative on Engineering Department projects for Root Pruning issues is the Senior Landscape Architect and can be reached at (727) 562-4747, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. SECTION IV Page 103 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches (10") per one inch (1") of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18") from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than eighteen inches (18"). H. Root pruning shall be performed using a root cutting machine specifically designed for this purpose. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 910-3. PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300. B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. C. No protected tree shall have more than thirty percent (30%) of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion -tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. SECTION IV Page 104 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. SECTION IV Page 105 of 105 Updated 3/5/2018 SECTION IVa —Supplemental Technical Specifications SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS These Supplemental Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions Section III and Technical Specifications Section IV of the Constitution Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions that are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. Table of Contents: 1. Modifications to Section III — General Conditions STS -01 Modifications to Section 6.11 2. Additional Technical Specifications - Additions to Section IV 01025 Measurement and Payment 02050 Demolition 03010 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies 05120 Structural Steel 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 07411 Metal Roof Panels 09800 Chemical Resistant Coating 11240 Alum Pump Skid 11500 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Tanks 13310 Ultrasonic Level Measurement 15400 Eye Wash Stations 16050 General Provisions 16100 Basic Materials 16110 Raceways and Fittings 16120 Wires and Cables 16130 Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16170 Protective Devices 16421 Panelboards 16500 Lighting Fixtures SECTION IVa — Supplemental Technical Specifications 16745 Fiber Optic Cable 17000 Control and Information System Scope and General Requirements 17030 Control and Information System Submittals 17040 Control and Information System Training Requirements 17070 Control and Information System Testing -General 17073 Field Testing 17074 Final Acceptance Test 17080 Quality Assurance 17120 Programable Logic Controller Components 17430 Local Control Panel Devices and Enclosure Construction 17920 Instrument Index and Input/Output Schedule SECTION IVa —Supplemental Technical Specifications 1. Modifications to Section 111 — General Conditions STS -01 Modifications to Section 6.11 The "AS -BUILT SURVEY" Referenced in section 6.11.2.1 shall not be required. Accordingly sections 6.11.2.2 and 6.11.2.3 are also not required. All other provisions of section 6.11 shall remain in effect. SECTION 01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Separate payment will be made only for the items of work described and listed on the Bid Form. Any related work not specifically listed, but required for satisfactory completion of the work, shall be considered to be included in the scope of the appropriate listed work items unless specifically called out as a separate Pay Item. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable Pay Items or work: 1. Clean-up and miscellaneous restoration. 2. Hydrostatic pressure or leak testing of piping or vessels 3. All materials testing required to verify proper construction and installation in accordance with these specifications or standard engineering practice, including but not limited to: concrete density (density tests and cylinder breaks). All such testing shall be by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor. 4. Coordination of equipment requirements between individual systems and vendors, testing and placing each system in operation. 5. Submittal, record drawings, operations and maintenance manuals for each system of new equipment to adequately demonstrate proper operation and manufacturer's training of operations personnel. 6. Demolition of existing structures and/or systems inherently required for proper installation of proposed systems, if not specifically broken out separately herein. 7. Maintenance of operation of the existing treatment process. 8. Traffic control and all safety precautions required to minimize impact to typical plant operations. 9. Compliance with applicable permit conditions. 10.Obtaining any additional permits required for completion of the work not previously obtained by the OWNER/ENGINEER OF RECORD, as well as any required inspections by permitting agencies and associated fees. B. BID ITEM NO. 1 - MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION 1. Description: The work associated with this item consists of the preparatory work and operations in mobilization for beginning work along with the activities normally involved in the ending of the project. Mobilization activities include but are not limited to the costs of bonds and any required insurance, permits and any other pre -construction expenses necessary for the start of the work, excluding the cost of materials and labor included in other pay items. 3/29/2018 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01025-1 Demobilization activities include, but are not limited to, termination and removal of temporary utility services; restoration of contractor's storage and staging area; disposal of trash and rubbish and any other post construction work necessary for the proper conclusion of the work. 2. Measurement: The quantity under this item shall be measured as one (1) lump sum quantity. 3. Payment: Payment for mobilization will be made at such time when the CONTRACTOR has completed mobilization and will not exceed 75% of the lump sum bid amount for mobilization/demobilization. Payment for demobilization will be made at such time when the CONTRACTOR has completed demobilization. C. BID ITEM NO. 2 — MARSHALL STREET WRF ALUM FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 1. Description: The work at the Marshall Street WRF includes the phased demolition of the existing interior alum feed system such that the existing feed system remains operational during the upgrade. Demolition includes removal of three existing fiberglass alum tanks and their concrete bases, cutting an opening in the facilities concrete/CMU wall for placement of new fiberglass tanks, removal of the existing alum feed pumps and existing electrical connections. Demolition of an adjacent unused lime slaking structure is also included. The new installation will include two (2) new fiberglass alum tanks, PVC piping, associated concrete bases, floor repairs and a short length of concrete pipe trench. A new modular alum pump skid, tank level gauges, eye wash stations and SCADA integration are also included. Once installed the concrete wall will be replaced and finished in kind. 2. Measurement: The quantity for payment shall be one (1) lump sum quantity based on the bid price for this item. This sum represents all work completed at the Marshal Street WRF with the exception of mobilization and any approved allowance work resulting in a complete and operational system 3. Payment: Payment of the applicable lump price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the system completely and ready for operation. D. BID ITEM NO. 3 — NORTHEAST WRF ALUM FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS 3/29/2018 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01025-2 1. Description: The work associated with this item includes furnishing and installing the pumped jet sludge mixing equipment as specified in contract documents. Northeast WRF: The work at the Northeast WRF includes the construction of a covered outdoor containment structure with pipe trenches, installation of two (2) new fiberglass alum tanks, modular alum pump skid with stand, PVC piping, power, lighting, level sensors, SCADA integration, eyewash stations, sump pump and stand for the City's existing tote based chemical feed (Micro C) as detailed on contract drawings and specifications. Once the new system is operating the existing polyethylene storage tank and pumps are to be demolished. 2. Measurement: The quantity for payment shall be one (1) lump sum quantity based on the bid price for this item. This sum represents all work completed at the Northeast WRF with the exception of mobilization and any approved allowance work resulting in a complete and operational system 3. Payment: Payment of the applicable lump price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the system completely and ready for operation. H. BID ITEM NO. 4 — OWNERS ALLOWANCE 1. Description: The work associated with this item includes an Owners' Allowance for any additional work as identified by the OWNER or ENGINEER. Any amount of extra work and/or alterations to this contract charged to the allowance shall be fully documented and approved in writing, in advance, by the City or designee. All work performed under the Allowance for shall be completed in accordance with all conditions and requirements of this contract and shall include the Work to be done by all necessary subcontractors and/or suppliers. 2. Measurement: The Work in this Section shall be paid for by a portion of the Allowance in the bid form of this contract. Use of any portion of this pay item shall require written pre -approval by the City or designee. This Work, materials, and equipment, when required, will be ordered in writing by the OWNER or ENGINEER, at a lump sum price for installation completed and accepted by the County. The lump sum unit price will be determined by negotiation, and require written pre -approval by the County or designee as back-up documentation for payment purposes 3. Payment: The quantities of Allowance Work to be paid for under this item shall be the applicable negotiated price for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment, including subcontractors. The total for all allowance work completed shall not exceed the amount listed on the bid form. 3/29/2018 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01025-3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) - END OF SECTION - 3/29/2018 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01025-4 02050 Demolition PART 1 - GENERAL 1. Scope of Work 1.1.This work includes the demolition and disposal of selected equipment and structures at the Northeast and Marshall Street Water Reclamation Facilities. 1.2.AII existing alum feed facilities are to remain operational until the proposed alum feed systems are online. 1.3. The contractor shall be responsible for the removal and disposal of debris, scrap and equipment. 1.4.AII construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers and/or dumpsters for their disposal and hauling needs pursuant to Code of Ordinance section 32.272(1). Contact Mike Pryor at 727-562-4923, email michael.prvora,mvclearwater.com at the City of Clearwater Solid Waste Department for availability and pricing. 1.5.The cost of demolition and disposal is included in the lump sum cost of this project. No additional payment for demolition or disposal will be made. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (not used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3. EXECUTION 3.1. Marshall Street Water Reclamation Facility Includes the following demolition 3.1.1. Existing mezzanine, supports and equipment (unused lime equipment shown on sheet D-2) 3.1.2. Existing alum tanks and base slabs. One tank on the east end to remain in service until the new equipment is online. 3.1.3. Existing alum feed pumps and piping (to remain in service until new equipment is online) 3.1.4. Selected demolition of the north wall as shown on sheets D-1, D-2, S-1 and S-2 for installation of the new storage tanks. 3.2. Northeast Water Reclamation Facility includes the following demolition 3.2.1. One the new alum system is operational the existing alum tank and pumps are to be removed and discarded. 3.2.2. The existing Micro -C feed pump and storage tote shall be relocated to the new alum feed facility. 02050 Demolition SECTION 03010 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals to install all steel bars, steel wire, and wire fabric required for the reinforcement of concrete, as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. B. The cost for concrete reinforcement shall be included in the prices bid for the various items of the proposals and shall be full compensation for the furnishing, testing, storing, protecting, shaping, placing and maintaining in position of all steel reinforcement, irrespective of type, together with any supporting chairs and clips, tie wires, spacers, bolsters, and other fastenings, wire clips for wrapping, and the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools and appliances necessary to complete the work as shown on the Contract Drawings, specified or required for the proper completion of the installation. 1.02 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All testing agencies shall meet the requirements of "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction," ASTM F-329. B. Cut and bend reinforcing steel to conform to the dimensions shown and within the following tolerances: Sheared length Stirrups, ties and spirals All other bends ±1 inch (25 mm) ±1 inch (25 mm) ±1 inch (25 mm) 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS A. Detail reinforcing in accordance with the requirements of ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" and ACI 315R "Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structures." B. Shop drawing submittals shall include: bar lists and bending diagrams showing the individual weight of each bar, the total weight of each bar size, and the total weight of bars on the List. C. Submit certified copies of mill tests showing chemical and physical analyses. D. Have testing performed in accordance with ASTM A615 as modified by ACI 318 building code requirements for reinforced concrete. E. Submit certificates stating that materials meet the specified requirements. 1.05 RELATED WORK A. Cast -In -Place Concrete, Section 03300 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ship reinforcing steel in bundles. B. Tag each bundle at the mill with a waterproof tag, in accordance with "Manual of Standard Practice" of the CRSI, showing the name of the mill, heat number, grade, size and identifying number. C. Concrete reinforcement shall be stored above ground on platforms or other supports, in an orderly manner to facilitate inspection and checking, and be protected from physical damage or contamination. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All reinforcement steel shall be of the grade and type as indicated on the Contract Drawing. B. Bars shall be bent cold to the shapes and dimensions as indicated in the Contract Drawings, or as required by the current "Manual of Standard Practice" of the CRSI. Steel shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material. Bars with kinks or improper bends shall not be used. C. Reinforcing steel shall be clean and free of scale, oil, and defects. D. The diameter of bend measured on the inside of the bar for standard hooks, other than stirrups and tie hooks, shall not be less than the values in the table below. 1 1 MINIMUM DIAMETERS OF BEND Bar Size Minimum Diameter 1 #3 through #8 6 bar diameters #9, #10, and #11 8 bar diameters #14 and #18 10 bar diameters ' 2.02 MATERIAL 1 A. Reinforcing Bars: 1. Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars: ASTM A615. 1 B. Plain Welded Wire Fabric: 1 1. Conform to ASTM A185, with the gauge and mesh as indicated an the Plan. 1 C. Plain Tie Wire: 1. Conform to Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement, 1 ASTM A82, 16-1/2 gauge minimum size. D. Metal Bar Supports: 1 1. Type 1, Standard a. All metal bar supports shall be fabricated from cold -drawn steel wire 1 in accordance with current CRSI Standards. 2. Type 2, Stainless Steel Protected 1 a. Shall be Type 1, with stainless steel wire conforming to ASTM A493 attached to the tips of the support so the nonstainless wire will lie no 1 closer than 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) from the form surface. 3. Type 3, Plastic Protected 1 a. Shall be of Type 1, with plastic coating of polyethylene conforming to ASTM D1248 on the legs and tips. 1 E. Concrete Bar Supports: ' 1. Precast Concrete Brick Supports Conform to ASTM C55, Type 1, Grade N. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CUTTING AND BENDING - REINFORCEMENT A. Do not bend bars in the field except to correct minor errors or damage in shipment or handling, or to make shipment of bars practicable. Bending shall be in accordance with Subsection 2.1. 3.02 BAR SUPPORTS AND SPACERS A. Support bars by means of bolsters or chairs with no less than the minimum required by ACI 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures. B. Reinforcing steel in the bottom of slabs resting on earth may be supported by concrete brick or mortar blocks. C. Hold reinforcing steel in position in walls, columns, piers, and abutments by means of mortar blocks, bar supports, or spacers wired to reinforcing steel. D. Do not use stones, clay bricks, wood blocks, or pieces of broken concrete to support reinforcing steel. E. Do not place bars or fabricated mats on layers of fresh concrete as the work progresses. 3.03 PLACING AND FASTENING A. Arrange and place reinforcing steel as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Secure reinforcement positively against displacement during placing of concrete. C. Wire or clip bars together as recommended in Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars." D. Place steel which is free from dirt, rust and mill scale, oil, grease, and other foreign matter. E. Placing Reinforcing Steel Variation of protective coating 2 inch cover ± inch (6.3 mm) Variation of protective coating 3 inch cover ±' inch (12.6 mm) Variation from indicating space ± 1 inch (25.4 mm) 3.04 SPLICING A. Furnish reinforcing bars in full lengths as shown on the Contract and shop drawings. B. Do not splice bars unless approved by the Engineer in writing. C. No splices Tess than 48 bar diameters or less than 1'-0" (305 mm) whichever is greater. 3.05 CONCRETE PROTECTION FOR REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcement shall be protected by the thickness of concrete indicated in the Contract Drawings. Where not otherwise shown, the thickness of concrete over the reinforcement shall be as follows. 1. Where concrete is deposited against the ground - not less than 3 inches (75 mm). 2. Where concrete is exposed to weather, ground sewerage, or sewerage gases, but placed in forms - not less than 2 inches (50 mm) for bars larger than No. 5 and 1' inches (38 mm) for No. 5 bars and smaller, except in beams, girders and columns. 3. In slabs and walls not exposed to ground, weather, sewerage or sewerage gases - not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). 4. In beams, girders, and columns not exposed to ground, weather, sewerage, or sewerage gases - not less than 11/2 inches (38 mm) all sizes. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Construct elements to meet the allowable tolerances of the dimensions, elevations, and positions shown and specified in Section 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete. B. Deposit concrete only when the forms and placement of the reinforcement steel has been checked and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide notice to the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of any contemplated concrete pour. END OF SECTION SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. See Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs -on -grade. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. C. Shop Drawings: For steel reinforcement. D. Material Test Reports or Certificates. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete" 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed. B. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150. B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded, 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) nominal maximum coarse -aggregate size. 1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. D. Air-: ntraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. E. Che ical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or a ' mixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 2.04 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure -sensitive tape. B. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class B. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure -sensitive tape. 2.05 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. E. Clear, Solvent -Borne, Membrane -Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 2.06 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100mm) before adding high -range water -reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25mm). 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 2.07 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fab icate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.08 CO CRETE MIXING A. Re-dy-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to AS M C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - ; XECUTION 3.01 FO " MWORK A. Des gn, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 to support vert cal, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be app ied, until structure can support such Toads. B. Con.truct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alig ment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Cha fer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. 3.02 EM EDDED ITEMS A. PIa•e and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adj • ining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete. Use setti g drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with item to be embedded. 3.03 VA OR RETARDERS A. Pia tic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to AS M E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3.04 ST EL REINFORCEMENT A. Gen-ral: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing rein orcement. 1 1 ' 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 3.05 JOINTS A. General: Construct true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of jointsP P concrete. ' B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1 C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth 1 equal to at least 2 inches (51 mm) of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 3/16 inch (4.7 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or ' otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. ' D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. C. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. ' D. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301. 3.07 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rou, h -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unf• rmed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a text re matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of for ed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indi ' ated. 3.08 FIN SHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. Ge eral: Comply with ACI 302.1 R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Tro el and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces. While con rete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces. C. Brom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ram's, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.09 CO CRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. Ge eral: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or of temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 301 for hot -weather protection during curing. B. Eva if h kg/ ma dar oration Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces t, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h (1 q. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to ufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or ying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Cur concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following met ods: 1. 2. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not Tess than seven days. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not Tess than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301. END OF SECTION SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals to install all unit masonry, steel bars, steel wire, and reinforcement required as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90; Weight Classification, Normal Weight; Type I, moisture -controlled units. 1 Special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, and other special conditions. 2 Square -edged units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Mortar: ASTM C 270, proportion specification. Ready -mixed mortar, ASTM C 1142, may be used at Contractor's option. 1 Masonry Cement: Do not use masonry cement. 2 Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 3 For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S or RS. 4 For reinforced masonry, use Type S or RS. 5 For exterior, above -grade, load-bearing and non -load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non -load-bearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N or RN. 6 Water -Repellent Additive: For mortar used with decorative concrete masonry units, use product recommended by manufacturer of units. B. Grout: ASTM C 476 with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm). 2.03 REINORCEMENT, TIES, AND ANCHORS A. St el Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 400). B. Joi t Reinforcement: ASTM A 951, hot -dip galvanized at both interior and exterior walls. 1 Wire Diameter for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188 inch (4.8 mm). 2 Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: W2.8 or 0.188 inch (4.8 mm). 3 For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder design or truss design. C. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1% inches (38 mm) wide by ' inch (6.4 mm) thick by 24 inches (600 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (50 mm) or with cross pins. 2.04 MISC LLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1. B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; made from styrene -butadiene rubber or PVC. C. Job -Mixed Masonry Cleaner: 1/2 cup (0.14-L) tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2 cup (0.14-L) laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. (4 L) of water. D. Acidic Masonry Cleaner: BASF. PART 3 - E ECUTION 3.01 INST LLATION, GENERAL A. Cut masonry units with saw. Install with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back units; do not tooth. E. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. F. Build non -load-bearing interior partitions full height and install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. G. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, unless otherwise indicated. H. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavities flush. 3.02 PARGING A. Parge predampened masonry walls, where indicated, with Type S or Type N mortar applied in 2 uniform coats with a steel -trowel finish. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. Damp cure parging for at least 24 hours. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly cured, remove large mortar particles, scrub, and rinse unit masonry. 1. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying acidic cleaner, then remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. END OF SECTION I I SECTION 05120 ISTRUCTURAL STEEL IPART 1 - GENERAL I1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals to install all structural I steel as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 SECTION REQUIREMENTS IA. Submittals: Shop Drawings. B. Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable IStress Design and Plastic Design," RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts," and AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel." PART 2 - PRODUCTS I2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL AND ACCESSORIES IA. Structural -Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 572, Grade 50, carbon steel. B. Cold -Formed Structural -Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. IC. Structural Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B. D. Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), headed bolts, Type 1, 1 heavy hex steel structural bolts and heavy hex carbon -steel nuts. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, high-strength I heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon -steel nuts, and hardened carbon -steel washers, uncoated. IF. Primer: Lead- and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, rust -inhibiting primer. G. Grout: ASTM C 1107, nonmetallic, shrinkage resistant, premixed. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications and tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel. IPART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERE «TION A. B. C. D. Erect structural steel according to AISC specifications and within erection tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." Set base and bearing plates on wedges, shims, or setting nuts. Tighten anchor bolts, cut off wedges or shims flush with edge of plate, and pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates. Bolted Connections: Install and tighten nonhigh-strength bolts, unless high- strength bolts are indicated. Snug tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1. END OF SECTION SECTION 05400 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and erect cold -formed metal framing to withstand design loads indicated within the following limits:. 1. Roof Deflection of L/240 for live plus dead loads, L/180 for windloads. B. Calculate structural characteristics of cold -formed metal framing according to AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." C. Submittals: Product Data Shop, Drawings and Material Certificates. D. Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code—Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel. E. Protect cold -formed metal framing from corrosion and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Purling: Fabricate with flange width of 2-1/2 inches (63mm), minimum uncoated steel design thickness of 0.075 inch (1.90mm), and of depths indicated. 2.2 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coated, structural steel; Grade 33 (Grade 320. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant coated, self -drilling, self -threading steel drill screws. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD -P-21035. PART 3 - XECUTION 3.1 F A. In T int co MING tall FRAMING AND ACCESSORIES LEVEL, PLUMB, SQUARE, AND TRUE LINE, AND SECURELY FASTEN. Temporarily brace framing until entire grated supporting structure has been completed and permanent nections are secured. B. Fasten framing members by welding or screw fastening. END OF SECTION SECTION 07411 METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data, and color Samples. B. Submit a written warranty, executed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace metal roof panels that fail to remain weathertight within five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL ROOF PANELS A. Steel Roof Panels: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) Thick, "R" Profile. B. Factory finish panel material by coil coating with 20coat fluoropolymer according to ASTM A 755 (ASTM A 755M), composed of inhibitive primer and color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight, with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.9 mil (0.023 mm). 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Provide all components required for a complete roof panel assembly including trim, fasciae, clips, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers. Closure strips, and similar items. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Anchor panels securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Field cutting exterior panels by torch is not permitted. B. Separate dissimilar metals with a bituminous coating or rubberized -asphalt underlayment. END OF SECTION SECTION 09800 CHEMICAL RESISTANT SECONDARY CONTAINMENT COATING 1.0 GENERAL 1.0 SCOPE 1.0.1 The work of this section includes the installation of fiberglass mat reinforced chemical resistant coating in the secondary containment structure at the MARSHALL STREET facility only. This section DOES NOT apply to the containment structure at the Northeast facility. The work includes surface preparation, filler/surfacer, coves, block filler, prime coat, base coat, mat reinforcement, saturant coat and top coat. The system shall provide a minimum of 72 hours of 50% Alum submersion in the event of tank failure. 1.1 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS 1.1.1 This specification together with the attached drawings, plus any referenced codes or standards, constitutes a complete set of requirements for the equipment under consideration. Should a conflict occur between any of the applicable documents, the Contractor shall bring such conflict to the attention of the City prior to start of installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 Submit shop drawings and product data the coating system provided. The submittal shall include cut sheets for each component with surface preparation, mixing and application instructions. 1.2.2 Installers experience showing at least three (3) fiberglass reinforced secondary containment systems in the last five years. 1.2.3 The Contractor shall employ a full time NACE certified inspector to record and document all daily activities. Provide inspector name and NACE number. 1.2.4 Contractors plan to dispose of hazardous materials and prevent exposure to City personnel during installation. 1.3 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS 1.3.1 The installer shall be fully qualified apply the specified coating system. The installer shall provide documentation and references for at least three (3) fiberglass reinforced secondary containment systems in the last five (5) years. 3/29-18 09800-1 Chemical Resistant Coating 2.0 MATERIALS 2.0 COATING SYSTEM: The coating system shall be Fiberglass Mat Reinforced Polyamine Epoxy Lining as manufactured by the Tnemec Company, Inc. of Kansas City Missouri or Engineer approved equivalent and shall be comprised of the following components. 2.0.1 Expansion Joints: Tnemec Series 201 with fumed silica 2.0.2 Filler/Surface (Non -CMU): Tnemec Series 218 (with filler as needed) 2.0.3 Coves: Tnemec Series 218 2.0.4 Block Filler (CMU only): Tnemec Series 1254 2.0.5 Prime Coat: Tnemec Series 208. Shall be able to withstand 15 lbs. of moisture vapor transmission per ASTM F1869. Must be alkaline insensitive to pH levels of 14. 2.0.6 Base Coat: Tnemec Series 237SC-MCK. Not less than 5,274 psi (36.4 MPa) flexural strength and 222,933 psi (1537 MPa) flexural modulus of elasticity, average of five tests (per ASTM D790). 2.0.7 Mat reinforcement: Tnemec Series 211-0215 2.0.8 Saturant Coat: Tnemec Series 237SC-RCK. Not less than 5,274 psi (36.4 MPa) flexural strength and 222,933 psi (1537 MPa) flexural modulus of elasticity, average of five tests (per ASTM D790) 2.0.9 Top coat: Tnemec Series 61. No blistering, cracking, or delamination of film after 14 months of continuous immersion in deionized water at 200°F (93 °C) per ASTM D870. Must be suitable for immersion service in 50% Alum. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.0 SURFACE PREPARATION 3.0.1 Installation shall be in accordance with all manufacturer's instructions. 3.0.2 The generator located adjacent to the containment area shall be protected from abrasive dust/grit generated during surface preparation. 3.0.3 All concrete must cure for a minimum of 10 days. 3.0.4 Remove all oils, grease, dust, molds, mildew, and other soluble contaminants. 3/29-18 09800-2 Chemical Resistant Coating 3.0.5 Remove all previously applied caulking from joints. 3.0.6 Mechanically abrade to remove all preexisting coatings, laitance, curing compounds, sealers, and other contaminants and to provide a uniform surface profile. (Reference ASTM D4259, minimum ICRI CSP 3). 3.0.7 Vacuum clean concrete to remove all dirt, dust, and other loose materials. 3.0.8 Prepared surfaces must be primed the same day. If between final surface preparation work and coating system application contamination of the prepared and cleaned substrate occurs, re -cleaning shall be required until the requirements of this Surface Preparation section are met. 3.0.9 All surfaces must be clean, dry, and abraded prior to the application of any coatings. 3.1 FILLING AND SURFACING 3.1.1 Expansion Joints: After installing backer rod, fill expansion joints with a 2:1 mixture of Fumed Silica and Tnemec Series 201. After filling expansion joints, wait a minimum of 24 hours to allow Series 201 to exceed its maximum recoat window. This will create a bond break between the expansion joints and the fiber mat system to be installed. 3/29-18 3.1.2 Filler / Surfacer (voids, bugholes, cracks in non -CMU substrates): As needed, apply Tnemec Series 218 to fill voids, bugholes, and cracks. Note: Series 218 may be mixed with mesh silica sand or pea gravel to fill larger cavities. 3.1.3 Coves (All 90° Angles): Apply Series 218 to create a 1" cove on all 90° angles. Note: Series 218 may be mixed with mesh silica sand or pea gravel to fill larger cavities. 3.1.4 Block Filler (CMU Only): Apply Tnemec Series 1254 at a rate of 75 to 100 ft2 per gallon. 3.1.5 Prime Coat: Tnemec Series 208 @ 16.0 — 20.0 mils dry film thickness. Note: To avoid outgassing, it is recommended that the Prime Coat be applied during periods of declining temperature. If bugholes are present in the Prime Coat, it is recommended that the remainder of the system also be installed during periods of declining temperatures. 3.1.6 Base Coat: Tnemec Series 237SC-MCK @ 60.0-80.0 mils dry film thickness. Spread uniformly by trowel or squeegee. Leave a smooth, even finish. 09800-3 Chemical Resistant Coating 3.1.7 Mat Reinforcement: Tnemec Series 211-0215 — 3/4 ounce chopped strand fiberglass mat. Press mat into the wet basecoat so that no hollow areas remain. Press firmly into corners. With a rib roller, back roll fiberglass to remove any air pockets. Follow immediately with Saturant Coat. 3.1.8 Saturant Coat: Tnemec 237SC-RCK. Apply while base coat is still wet @ 8.0-12.0 mils dry film thickness. Make sure that the mat is completely wet out and that the mat fibers have turned "translucent." CAUTION: Apply the Saturant Coat at a thickness to only wet out the fiberglass mat. 3.1.9 Top Coat: Tnemec Series 61 @ 4.0-6.0 mils dry film thickness. Apply Series 61 after the Saturant Coat has cured for 8 hours at 75°F, but no later than 24 hours. -END OF SECTION - 3/29 -18 09800-4 Chemical Resistant Coating SECTION 11240 ALUM METERING PUMPS AND SKID SYSTEMS 1. GENERAL 1.1. Scope The work under this section includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, documentation, training and startup services for the manufacture and installation of skid mounted chemical metering systems suitable for the application of chemicals as listed under the Service Conditions and as shown on the drawings and specified herein (the "Work"). Individual system requirements are as indicated in Table 1 at the end of this section. 1.2. Work Specified Herein A. Equipment 1. Chemical Metering Skids and Accessories 2. Chemical Metering Pumps and Pump Controls 3. Spare Parts B. Execution 1. Testing 2. Installation 3. Documentation 4. Services 1.3. Quality Assurance A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. A single manufacturer, who shall demonstrate previous experience in the design and fabrication of skid -mounted chemical metering systems, shall provide the products of this section. The manufacturer must have a service center with trained direct company employed technicians authorized to make repairs to all components of the chemical feed system located within the State of Florida. This supplier shall be responsible for providing all equipment, accessories, spare parts, documentation and installation supervision required for a complete and 11240-1 6/8/2017 operational chemical feed system. 2. The pump skids shall be a regularly marketed product of the manufacturer who must have a physical plant, technical and design staff, and production personnel to complete the work as specified. Systems assembled by second party fabricators, integrators, equipment distributors/representatives, contractors or manufacturers not normally engaged in chemical metering skid design and manufacturing shall not be acceptable. The chemical metering skids shall be assembled and tested by the manufacturer prior to delivery. 3. The design and fabrication of the chemical metering skids shall comply with the following criteria: a. Systems shall be designed completely in 3D CAD prior to fabrication. b. The metering skid shall be fabricated from white 1/2" PVC Type 1 sheet that is thermally welded resulting in a unitary piece of construction. Rotationally molded or skeletal frame skid construction is not acceptable. c. The PVC sheet shall be precision cut on state of the art CNC equipment using information from the project specific CAD drawings for each system. Hand cut (non -CNC) sheet construction is not acceptable. d. All piping shall be fabricated to CAD based production drawings that detail all pipe nipples, fittings, valves, metering accessories, clamp locations, etc. These drawings shall become a permanent part of the production file maintained by the manufacturer so that all or any portion of the piping can be pre -fabricated by the manufacturer and replaced in the field without any pipe cutting, gluing, welding etc. required. Hand built or reverse engineered piping assembly not based on CAD drawings is not acceptable. e. All power and control wiring as indicated on the P&I drawings shall terminate in a NEMA 4X terminal junction box (TJB) providing the site electrical contractor with a single point termination for each system. Any devices installed within the metering skid boundary that require power or interface connection to remote systems shall be pre -wired to the TJB by the manufacturer. f. The manufacturer, prior to delivery, shall hydraulically and electrically test each system. Testing shall be documented and include verification of pump performance and response to remote systems using simulation equipment as required. A copy of the shop 11240-2 6/8/2017 test report shall be included in the final O&M's for the project. 4. The manufacturer shall supply fifteen separate references with contact names and phone numbers, where substantially similar installations for the equipment as specified has been in satisfactory operation for a minimum of two years. 5. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience with a successful record of manufacturing and servicing of systems as specified herein. 6. The manufacturer shall have a proven track record of after market sales and service support on its equipment. A proposal for professional maintenance of the equipment by a factory technician shall be provided in the submittals. 7. The products of this section shall be manufactured by Blue Planet Environmental Systems, Inc. or Engineer approved equivalent product. B. Warranties 1. The system manufacturer shall provide a two (2) year warranty for the metering pumps (1 -year for liquid end), skid material/construction, and skid -mounted equipment, piping and valves. This warranty shall be in addition to and not in lieu of any warranties provided by the manufacturer of the equipment itself. 1.4. Submittals General A. Submit shop drawing and product data for the equipment provided. Include detailed schematic of equipment, piping, controls, etc. B. Submit a list of the manufacturers recommended spare parts, special tools and lubricants. List shall include local source for supply of all parts and professional service. C. Submit fifteen (15) separate references where similar chemical metering systems have been in successful operation for a minimum of 2 years. D. Submit a copy of proposed manufacturer's guarantee and local parts/service center information. 1.5. Section Specific Submittals A. The information requested in this section is required in order to determine that the manufacturer has the ability and resources to provide equipment that meets the design, fabrication and quality standards as set forth herein. Any submittals that do not include this information shall be returned as "Rejected 11240-3 6/8/2017 - Do Not Resubmit". B. In addition to the general submittals as specified herein and elsewhere, the following CAD drawings shall be provided as a part of the submittal package in a section labeled SHOP DRAWINGS for each chemical metering system included in this section. These drawings shall be produced "in-house" by the system manufacturer for the specific equipment to be provided for this project. Marked up copies of general product information is not acceptable. 1. P&I Diagram — The PID shall indicate the following: a. All process piping, valves, pumps and accessories installed within the skid boundary including pipe sizes, materials and piping inlet and outlet information. b. All skid mounted electrical/instrumentation switches, controls, indicators etc. including voltage and current ratings for any devices that require a power source. c. All controls, indicators, inputs, outputs and surge protection devices included in the local skid mounted NEMA 4X terminal junction box. d. All controls, indicators, inputs, outputs and surge protection devices included for any remote mounted control or interface panels being provided. 2. Detail Layout Drawing — The detail drawings shall include the following: a. Top, front, side and isometric views for the proposed metering systems. b. Top, front and side views shall include accurate overall dimensions and location and dimensions for all piping connections. c. Isometric view shall include callouts indicating all skid mounted components and piping connections. d. A table shall be provided with the quantity, part number, description, P/M kit (if applicable) and recommended maintenance interval for all major equipment items and metering accessories. 3. Terminal box drawing — The terminal box drawings shall include: a. Detail drawing of terminal box back panel layout including all panel mounted components terminals, etc. including details for all field 11240-4 6/8/2017 1 1 1 b. The back panel drawing shall include a table with quantity, part numbers and descriptions for all devices. Ic. Detail drawing of terminal box door layout including all panel - mounted components (lamps, switches, nameplates, etc.). 1 d. The front panel drawing shall include a table with quantity, part numbers and descriptions for all devices. 1 C. In addition to the general submittals as specified herein and elsewhere, the following information shall be provided as a part of the submittal package in a section labeled DOCUMENTATION, SPARE PARTS AND SERVICE. I 1. Factory Certificates 1 a. Copy of manufacturers in-house and field testing certificates. b. Copy of manufacturers installation inspection certificate. 1 2. Spare Parts and Maintenance a. Spare Parts List including: I • Contact information for manufacturer. 1 • Contact information for local service and support. connections. • Table of spare parts provided as per specifications. 1 • Information for any required lubricants. b. Maintenance Proposal including: I• Price for factory technician to perform normal preventive maintenance including all normal parts, jobsite labor and travel I charges. Proposal shall include schedule of services and shall be valid for 1 year. I • Price for all P/M kits and parts required for normal service. Proposal shall be valid for 1 year. ID. In addition to hard copies as specified elsewhere, a copy of the complete approved submittal shall be provided in PDF electronic format with bookmarks 1 1 11240-5 6/8/2017 and index for easy navigation. 1.6. Service Conditions 1. This project includes chemical metering systems designed for the following chemicals: Chemical Concentration Specific Gravity Temperature (Deg F) Alum 48% 1.3 Ambient 2. EQUIPMENT 1.1. General A. The chemical metering systems shall be completely self-contained and designed to safely feed metered amounts of all chemicals as listed under Service Conditions. Each chemical metering skid shall include chemical metering pumps, accessories, controls and options as indicated in Table 1 at the end of this section. The chemical metering skids will be completely assembled and tested under simulated field conditions using water prior to delivery to the job site. Manufacturer shall provide 2 weeks notice prior to testing of system to allow engineer/owner to make arrangements to witness the testing. 1.2. Chemical Metering Skids A. Chemical Metering Skids General Description 1. The chemical metering skids shall be constructed from white PVC sheet with a minimum trade thickness of 1/2". The design of the skid shall include gussets and supports as required for all components and shall be self-supporting. All components of the chemical metering system shall be contained within the skid. The skid shall incorporate spill containment capability and feature a 1/2" fpt connection for containment drain piping. The skids shall be manufactured using continuous welding technology; bolted construction is not acceptable. Pedestals shall be provided to elevate the metering pumps above the skid base. The pedestals shall be bolted to the skid base with non-metallic bolts to allow for future 11240-6 6/8/2017 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 pump/piping modifications. 2. Enclosed Pump Skid —For outdoor placement, the pump skid shall be enclosed on the top and sides with white PVC sheet with a minimum trade thickness of 1/2". The enclosure design of the skid shall include gussets and supports as required for all components and shall be self- supporting. All components of the chemical metering system shall be contained within the enclosure with the exception of the NEMA 4X panel, which shall be attached to the outside. The enclosure shall provide adequate ventilation to reduce heat build up and include LED interior lighting. The enclosure shall include removable tinted acrylic sliding doors. 3. For each chemical metering pump the piping system shall include (1) suction line strainer; (1) pressure relief valve; (1) pulsation dampener; (1) diaphragm protected pressure gauge; (1) back-pressure/anti-siphon valve; (1) flushing inlet; (1) flushing outlet and all required piping, valves and supports. Piping shall include isolation valves and unions for all serviceable components. The chemical supply piping shall feature a calibration column designed for independent use with any of the metering pumps while other pumps on the system are in active service. The discharge piping shall provide outlets as indicated in Table 1. The pump connections shall be designed with replaceable pipe sections on the suction and discharge via union or flange so that pump replacement or upgrade can be accomplished without cutting into skid piping. 4. The piping shall be attached to the chemical metering skid with a non- metallic corrosion resistant support system. All support channels shall be welded to the skid, bolted supports are not acceptable. The straps shall be removable and reusable to allow for servicing of the system. All inlet/outlet connections, valves and pump accessories shall be clearly labeled on the skid for easy identification. 5. A NEMA 4X FRP terminal box shall be provided on the skid back panel for termination of all wiring. A power outlet with weatherproof cover shall be provided for any metering pumps or accessories that require an outlet. The inside cover of the terminal box shall include a wiring diagram detailing the function of all terminals. A power disconnect switch shall be provided in the terminal junction box. Surge protection shall be provided locally in the skid mounted terminal junction box. Protection shall be provided for the main power supply as well as all analog input and output signals. Surge protection devices shall be as manufactured by EDCO Inc. of Florida. The NEMA 4X TJB shall provide the following I/O at a 11240-7 6/8/2017 minimum: a. Terminals for 120VAC power (local heavy duty surge protection included). b. 15A Breaker for Main AC Power. c. HOA Selector Switch for each pump. d. DI = Run Command for each pump. e. Al = Speed Command for each pump (local surge protection included) f. AO = Speed Feedback for each pump g. DO = Remote Status for each pump h. DO = Fault Status for each pump 6. The chemical metering skids shall be completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer prior to delivery to the job site. B. Accessories 1. Calibration Columns a. A clear calibration column shall be provided in the chemical supply piping of each system. The piping shall be designed for the calibration column to be used independently with any of the metering pumps while other pumps on the system are in active service. The top of the calibration column shall allow for connection to rigid piping for "vent" return to the supply container or common vent header. Calibration columns may also be used as de -gassing chambers. All materials shall be compatible with chemicals as listed under Service Conditions and Table 1. 2. Pressure Relief Valves a. Pressure relief valves shall be provided in the discharge piping of each metering pump, prior to any valves, to eliminate the buildup of excess pressure in the system. The pressure relief valves shall be fully adjustable from 10 — 150 psi with bodies compatible with chemicals as listed under Service Conditions and Table 1, a Teflon diaphragm and have no metal parts in contact with the chemical. Output of the pressure relief valves shall return to the pump suction 11240-8 6/8/2017 header. 3. Pulsation Dampeners a. Gas charged pulsation dampeners shall be provided and sized for a minimum of 90% dampening. Pulsation dampeners shall include gas charge fitting and 316SS pressure gauge. The dampeners shall be installed in the discharge piping of each metering pump, as close to the metering pump discharge check valve as possible. Pulsation dampeners larger than 10 cu. in. shall attach to the piping by ANSI 150# flanges with 316 SS bolts, threaded connections are not acceptable. All materials shall be compatible with chemicals as listed under Service Conditions and Table 1. 4. Diaphragm Protected Pressure Gauges a. 2-1/2" liquid filled pressure gauges with isolators shall be provided for indication of system pressure in the discharge piping of each metering pump. Industrial quality all 316 Stainless Steel gauges shall be utilized. The isolators shall have housings compatible with chemicals as listed under Service Conditions and Table 1 with a Teflon diaphragm and suitable liquid fill. A fabricated PVC bracket shall be provided for each pressure gauge to secure the isolator and prevent lateral movement of the pressure gauge. 5. Back Pressure/Anti-Siphon Valves a. Back pressure/anti-siphon valves shall be provided in the discharge piping of each metering pump to provide constant back pressure at the chemical metering pump discharge and eliminate siphoning. The back pressure valves shall be fully adjustable from 10 —150 psi with bodies compatible with chemicals as listed under Service Conditions and Table 1, a Teflon diaphragm and have no metal parts in contact with the chemical. C. Piping 1. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) a. This specification covers pipe and fittings for pressurized pipe systems manufactured of Rigid Poly (Vinylchloride) (PVC) material as described below. Fittings covered under this specification include heavy-duty Schedule 80 fittings molded of the material described below. Fittings covered under this specification are tees, elbows, couplings, reducer bushings, crosses, adapters, plugs, caps and flanges. b. All pipe and fittings shall bear the company's name or trademark, 11240-9 6/8/2017 material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule, and the NSF mark as indicative of compliance with this specification. c. All fittings shall be injection molded of PVC fitting compound of cell classification 12454-B as described in ASTM D- 1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinylchloride) Compounds Compounds. d. All material used in pipe and fittings for potable water supply shall be listed for such applications by National Sanitation Foundation Laboratories, Inc. (NSF). Workmanship shall be in accordance with good commercial practice. Fittings shall be homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions or other injurious defects. The fittings shall be commercially uniform in color, opacity, density and other physical properties. e. All molded threads, internal or external, shall be "blunt start" threads. All threads shall conform to thread standard ANSI/ASME B1 .20.1 for tapered pipe threads. Threads shall measure not more than 11/2 threads large or small when checked with a plug gauge or ring gauge. f. Dimensions and tolerances of sockets shall conform to PVC IPS Schedule 40/80 Socket Dimensions. All reducer bushings shall be designed so as to provide for a positive and sufficient grip for cementing bushings in place. 4.3.2 Waterways shall be smooth and commercially free of flash and irregularities. On tees and 90° elbows, bond lines shall not coincide with the maximum stress area (crotch). g. Assembly shall be performed in a controlled shop environment by the skid manufacturer. All pipe shall be squarely cut on precision equipment with the ends chamfered and deburred. All socket welded connections shall follow the guidelines set by the pipe/fitting manufacturer for proper cleaning, priming and gluing procedures. A heavy bodied solvent suitable for use with all chemicals as listed under section 1.7 Service Conditions and Table 1 shall be used. All threaded connections will utilize Teflon tape, a suitable thread sealant or a combination of both. Threaded connections shall utilize stainless steel reinforcement rings where applicable to reduce the risk of cracking. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D. Valves — The valves for each system shall be as indicated in Table 1. I 1. Type 21 Ball Valve a. All TYPE 21 Ball Valves, sizes 1/2" to 4", shall be of true union 11240-10 6/8/2017 1 1 1 design with two-way blocking capability. All O -rings shall be EPDM or FKM with PTFE seats. PTFE seats shall have elastomeric backing cushion of the same material as the valve seals. Stem shall have double O -rings and be of blowout -proof design. The valve handle shall double as carrier removal and/or tightening tool. ISO mounting pad shall be integrally molded to valve body for actuation. The ball valves shall have a pressure rating of 230 psi for sizes"1/2" to 3" and 150 psi for 4" at 70 ° F. Type 21 Bali Valves must carry a two-year guarantee, as manufactured by Asahi/America, Inc. b. All ball valves used for chemicals prone to "off -gassing" (e.g. sodium hypochlorite, hydrogen peroxide) shall be vented to avoid entrapment of vapors. 1.3. Chemical Metering Pumps A. The chemical metering pump(s) shall be microprocessor -controlled, simplex, solenoid -driven, reciprocating, mechanically -actuated diaphragm type. All pumping functions shall be set by membrane -switch keypad and status shall be displayed on an illuminated LCD, which is readable. Keypad will allow for simple scrolling and display of programmed parameters. The housing shall be rated NEMA 4X. B. The power supply shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz, single phase. The microprocessor is to automatically compensate for supply voltage variations within 15% of the rated voltage such that the frequency of the pump remains constant. C. The liquid end shall be physically separated from the drive unit by a backpiate with weep hole creating an air gap. An elastomer shaft wiper seal shall prevent contamination of the solenoid if the primary diaphragm fails. The diaphragm shall be constructed of a steel core, vulcanized into nylon - reinforced EPDM, with PTFE faced fluid contact surface. D. The pump shall utilize optoDrive® technology or equal whereby the time sequence of the dosing flow can be exactly matched to the requirements of the application. The user can set a slow pressure stroke for almost continuous dosing, or a quick stroke as needed to prevent incomplete filling of the liquid end due to viscosity of the media being pumped. In cases of outgassing dosing media, the settable suction stroke shall assist in preventing cavitation. Fluctuation in back pressure shall be automatically compensated by the drive. E. The pump shall have optoGuard® technology integrated into the drive to detect blocked metering points or broken metering lines, and to detect airlocks within the delivery unit. This will function to prevent uncontrolled 11240-11 6/8/2017 metering. These problems are to be shown on the pump delay. F. The liquid end shall be constructed of PVDF with Teflon seals, with built-in coarse valve and needle valve for air bleed, manually adjusted for continuous degassing of process fluid and self -priming against pressure. The suction and discharge valves shall be of the single ball check design. G. Stroke length control shall be manually adjusted between 0% and 100% with a stroke adjustment knob on the pump face control, The LCD shall digitally display stroke length setting in 1% increments in the full range between 0% and 100%. H. Programming shall allow pump to be calibrated so as to display pump output in gallons/hour or liters/hour. Calibration shall be maintained when stroke length is altered up to plus or minus 10% on the stroke length knob. If stroke length is altered by more than 10%, a yellow warning will light and a flashing message "calib" will appear. I. The pump shall be equipped with the programmable function of pressure levels to allow pump to operate at reduced pressures from the maximum rated pressure of the pump (not available for models 0450 and 0280). J. The pump shall be equipped with the programmable function of electronic interlocking of the keypad by access code to prevent unauthorized adjustments to the pump. K. Keypad shall allow for scrolling and display on LCD such parameters as stroke frequency, stroke length, stroke counter, pump output in gals/hr or I/hr, dosing quantity, mA current input being received by pump, and indication of external mode. L. Stroke frequency control shall be accomplished by one of the following modes: 1. Manual - Manually adjusted by touch keypads, with the set stroke rate displayed on the LCD. 2. Contact 1:1 - The metering pump shall be capable of receiving a pulse input via optional external control cable such that 1 pulse gives 1 pump stroke rate. The pump shall be capable of remote ON-OFF operation using the pause function via a voltage free contact relay through an optional control cable. 3. Contact Multiply/Divide - The pump shall allow fine-tune factoring to issue from 1 to 9,999 strokes per pulse input or to issue 1 stroke per 1 to 9,999 input pulses. The dosing can be activated by an impulse via external control through a contact or a semiconductor switching 11240-12 6/8/2017 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 element. 4. Batch - The dosing can be activated by pressuring the P key or by an external impulse through a contact or a semiconductor switching element. A dosing quantity (batch) or a number of strokes (max 65535) can be preselected via the control unit. 5. Analog - The pump shall accept an analog signal such that stroke frequency is proportional to 0/4-20mA or 20-4/OmA, the choice of which is programmable at the pump. The pump shall allow the setting of a maximum stroke rate which corresponds to the maximum analog signal, with stroke rate proportional to signal strength below that rate. Programming for curve processing shall also be possible, in which any stroke frequency ratio in proportion to the electrical signal can be configured. Analog to digital converters external to the pump shall not be allowed. M. Relay Output — An SPDT relay shall be installed for fault indication. The metering pump shall have an integral relay to allow remote annunciation of a fault condition configurable as a normally open or normally closed contact closure relay. N. The chemical metering pumps shall be the Delta Series as manufactured by Prominent Fluid Controls or Engineer approved equal. 1.4. Metering Pump Controls A. Chemical metering pumps shall include built-in microprocessor controls as described above. All metering pump control cables shall terminate in the NEMA 4X FRP control panel mounted to the chemical metering skid. 1.5. Spare Parts A. Spare Parts 1. Provide the following spare parts to the OWNER for each chemical metering skid upon delivery of the pump skid. Spare parts shall include all parts required for (2) years of normal maintenance of all components of the chemical metering system. All parts shall be in one box labeled with the Skid ID Information: a. (1) maintenance kits for each chemical metering pump. Maintenance kits shall include but not be limited to diaphragm, 11240-13 6/8/2017 1 1 check valve seats, gaskets and o -rings. b. (1) Maintenance kits for each pressure relief valve for each pump skid. c. (1) Maintenance kit for each back pressure valve for each pump 1 skid. d. (1) Spare bladder for each pulsation dampener for each pump skid. ' e. (1) Spare valve of each size for each pump skid. f. (1) Parts list for all serviceable components. 3. EXECUTION 1 1.1. Installation A. Install the chemical metering skids as indicated on the drawings and specified , and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1.2. Inspection and Testing 1 A. Upon completion of installation, a full operating test shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer and a qualified direct company employed ' manufacturer's representative. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment required for such test and shall correct any deficiencies noted. , 1.3. Manufacturer's Services A. The manufacturer shall provide the following services as specified. 1 1. Delivery a. Delivery shall be by the manufacturer's own personnel and delivery vehicle. The delivery person shall be capable of giving the contractor guidance on the installation of the system. Delivery by independent 1 freight carrier is unacceptable. 2. Mechanical Start -Up Services 1 a. Provide one (1) 8 -hour working days of mechanical start-up 1 1 11240-14 6/8/2017 1 services. 3. Process Start -Up Services a. Provide one (1) 8 -hour working days of process start-up services. 4. Operator Training Services a. Provide one (1) 8 -hour working day to instruct operating personnel on the operation and maintenance of the system. 1.4. Operation & Maintenance Manuals and Production Records A. Operating and maintenance manuals prepared specifically for this project shall be provided. Manuals shall include all procedures, drawings, parts lists, etc. required to instruct personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be prepared in accordance with all specifications of this project. 1. Complete operating and maintenance manuals shall be provided in PDF electronic format with bookmarks and index for easy navigation. 2. Operating and maintenance manuals shall include a copy of in-house testing certificate. B. A detailed database shall be maintained by the manufacturer containing production data for each chemical metering system. The database shall include serial numbers for all serialized components, production drawings, test data, ship dates, start-up dates and all relevant information. 1.5. Warranties A. The system manufacturer shall provide a two (2) year warranty for the metering pumps (1 -year liquid end), skid material/construction, and skid - mounted equipment, piping and valves. This warranty shall be in addition to and not in lieu of any warranties provided by the manufacturer of the equipment itself. B. The system manufacturer shall pass through any warranties from the equipment suppliers for the pumps, controllers, and other system components manufactured by others. 11240-15 6/8/2017 Table 1 Skid Number #1 Indoor -Marshall Street 2 48% Alum Solenoid -driven mechanically actuated diaphragm with built-in microprocessor controls Prominent Delta 0280 73 Watt PVDF/Cer/PTFE Manual Manual and 4-20 mA 19.8 gph @ 29 psi SCH-80 PVC Type 21 2 Spill Containment Base #2 Outdoor -Northeast 2 48% Alum Solenoid -driven mechanically actuated diaphragm with built-in microprocessor controls Prominent Delta 0280 73 Watt PVDF/Cer/PTFE Manual Manual and 4-20 mA 19.8 gph @ 29 psi SCH-80 PVC Type 21 2 Enclosed for outdoor installation. Location # Pumps Chemical Type Pump Model Motor Horsepower Liquid End Mtls. Stroke Length Control Stroke Rate Control Pump Capacity (GPH (a) PSI) Piping Material Type Valves Skid Piping Outputs Optional Accessories ***END OF SECTION*** 11240-16 6/8/2017 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 11500 FIBERGLASS REINFORECED PLASTIC ALUM TANKS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE 1.1.1 This specification outlines the fabrication and procurement requirements for four (4) 3,030 -gallon single wall fiberglass reinforced plastic aluminum sulfate solution (alum) storage tanks for installation at the Marshall Street (indoor) and Northeast (outdoor) wastewater reclamation facilities (WRF). The alum will be stored at ambient temperature and pressure. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARD 1.2.1 Equipment built to these specifications shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3299 for filament wound tanks, ASTM D4097 for contact molded tanks, and National Bureau of Standards Voluntary Product Standard NBS PS15-69. 1.3 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS 1.3.1 This specification together with the attached drawings, plus any referenced codes or standards, constitutes a complete set of requirements for the equipment under consideration. Should a conflict occur between any of the applicable documents, the Fabricator shall bring such conflict to the attention of the Purchaser prior to start of fabrication. 1.4 SUBMITTALS 1.4.1 Prior to beginning fabrication, the Fabricator shall furnish to the Purchaser for approval three (3) copies of drawings, which shall show the following: 1.4.1.1 All information supplied by the Purchaser (Paragraph 2.1) 1.4.1.2 Certified dimensions of overall equipment, thickness and attachments. 1.4.1.3 Construction specifications (NBS PS 15-69, and/or ASTM D3299) 1.4.1.4 Maximum temperature 1.4.1.5 Maximum specific gravity or pressure 1.4.1.6 Shop testing procedures 1.4.1.7 Nozzle schedule, including size, mark, thickness and rating 1.4.1.8 Details of all nozzles, joints and reinforcements 1.4.1.9 Details of all ladders, lifting, hold down or support lugs 1.4.1.10 Specifications for all supplied bolting and gaskets and accessory items. Rev 102408.1000.34 1.4.1.11 Equipment weight, empty and filled with water (pounds) 1.4.1.12 Equipment capacity (gallons) 1.4.1.13 Ultraviolet absorbers or other pigments 1.4.1.14 Purchase order number, project number and equipment number 1.4.1.15 All materials of construction and laminate sequence of construction 1.4.1.16 Method used for postheat curing, if applicable. 1.5 NAMEPLATES 1.5.1 Tanks built to these specifications shall have the following information printed on nameplates of appropriate size for the equipment involved. 1.5.1.1 Name of Fabricator 1.5.1.2 Capacity in Gallons 1.5.1.3 Chemical Environment 1.5.1.4 Fabricator Serial Number 1.5.1.5 Year Built 1.5.1.6 Name and Equipment Number 1.5.1.7 Purchase Order Number 1.5.1.8 Maximum Specific Gravity 1.5.1.9 Design Pressure and Temperature 1.5.1.10 Resin 1.6 FABRICATOR QUALIFICATIONS 1.6.1 Fabricator shall be fully qualified to design and build the vessels under this specification with demonstrated experience of at least 10 years in the sizes and services required. Fabricator shall hold an independent certification demonstrating qualification such as ASME RTP -1 or ISO 9001. Certification shall be provided to the Purchaser during submittal. 2.0 MATERIALS 2.1 TANK DETAILS and ACCESSORIES 2.1.1 Number of Tanks: Four (4); Two Interior (Marshall Street), Two Exterior (Northeast) 2.1.2 Chemical: Alum (Aluminum Sulfate Solution) SG=1.3 2.1.3 Nominal Volume: 3,175 gallons 2.1.4 Operating Volume: 3025 gallons 2.1.5 Tank Diameter: 7'-0" Rev 102408.1000.34 2.1.6 Tank Sidewall Height: 11'-1" 2.1.7 Tank Bottom: Flat 2.1.8 Tank Top: Dome 2.1.9 Wind Load: 155 mph 2.1.10 Additional Top Load: 25 lbs/ft^2 2.1.11 Temperature: Ambient 2.1.12 Design Pressure: 0 psig 2.1.13 One (1) Nameplate, 316 Stainless Steel 2.1.14 One (1) State of Florida signed and sealed Engineering Calculations 2.1.15 One (1) Sight level gauge with calibrated tape, 8' 2.1.16 Two (2) 2" FRP NPT couplings (sight gauge) 2.1.17 Two (2) 2" flanged and gusseted nozzles (fill, drain) 2.1.18 One (1) 3" flanged and gusseted Nozzle (overflow) 2.1.19 One (1) 6" flanged and gusseted nozzle (ultrasonic level sensor) 2.1.20 One (1) 4" FRP vent 2.1.21 One (1) 24" top flanged duct manway with FRP cover 2.1.22 One (1) 24" side entry manway with FRP cover 2.1.23 Four (4) Heavy duty galvanized steel tie downs (anchor bolt design and supply by others) 2.1.24 Two (2) Large galvanized steel lift lugs 2.2 RESIN 2.2.1 The resins used in fabrication of the alum tanks shall be vinyl ester. 2.2.1.1 Vinyl ester resins to be Ashland Chemical's Derakane 411 or Hetron 922, or equal. 2.2.2 The resin shall not contain fillers unless specified. When specified, up to 5% by weight of thixotropic agent, Cab-O-Sil or equal, may be used for viscosity control in the paraffinated top coat on vertical surfaced, provided it will not interfere with visual inspection. No dyes or pigments will be used unless authorized by the Purchaser. Rev 102408.100034 2.2.3 The cure system used for the resin shall be in accordance with the resin Fabricator's current recommendations. Proper curing of the resin is the Fabricator's responsibility. All products fabricated to this specification shall be cured to at least 90% of the minimum Barcol hardness specified by the resin Fabricator. (Note: The use of paraffin in the resin or the use of Nexus veil may lower the Barcols hardness below the resin Fabricator's specifications). 2.2.4 No chemical -resistant surface, interior or exterior shall be acetone sensitive. A wax containing resin coating, formulated according to the resin Fabricator's most recent recommendations, must be applied over any interior secondary bonds to achieve an air - inhibited cure. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT 2.3.1 One layer of Nexus surfacing veil shall be used to reinforce the inner surface. Thickness of the resin rich inner surface shall be 0.020" to 0.025". Total thickness of the inner surface and interior layer shall be not less than 0.100". Nexus shall be Style 100-10 Aperturned 1.5 oz. Dacron polyester fiber 12-16 mils thick as manufactured by Burlington Glass Fabric Company. The interior layer shall be applied in a minimum of two passes of chopped strand roving using automatic fabrication equipment which controls raw material deposition to rotating molds through the use of digital readout programmable controllers for raw material use verification. Resin content of the interior layer shall be 70%, plus or minus 5%. 2.3.2 Structural portion of vessel wall shall utilize continuous winding glass for hoop properties (and unidirectional glass as required for additional axial properties) interspersed with automatically applied chopped glass and resin. Resin to glass content shall be 50/50 plus or minus 5%. 3.0 Execution 3.1 GENERAL 3.1.1 It is the object of this standard and associated drawings and specifications to afford the Fabricator as much design latitude as possible, consistent with the basic requirements. Therefore, it is intended that the Fabricator will have ample opportunity to utilize his particular "know-how" in the design and details of equipment fabrication in order to produce equipment, which will adequate for the intended purpose and at a minimum cost. 3.1.2 For custom contact molded storage tanks subject to hydrostatic head, the design stress shall be 10% of the minimum ultimate tensile stress of the selected laminate thickness, thereby providing a factor of safety of 10:1 against shell or head rupture. 3.1.3 For filament wound storage tanks subject to hydrostatic head the design stress shall be determined by the following formula: Rev 102408.1000.34 3.1.4 The minimum wall thickness shall be designed with the inclusion of the corrosion liner and be no less than 1/4" regardless of operating conditions. T = PD where: 2 ETZ T = Thickness P = Max. internal pressure in psi D = Diameter in inches E = Hoop tensile modulus Z = Allowable strain = 0.001 in/in maximum 3.1.5 Where top heads of vertical tanks are required to support operating personnel, auxiliary equipment or snow loads; stiffener rods thickening or heads or other means shall be used to provide structural rigidity. 3.1.6 The outer surface of the fabricated product shall be relatively smooth and no glass fibers shall be exposed. On custom contact molded equipment, the final ply shall be mat or spray -up. 3.1.7 An ultraviolet stabilizer as recommended by the resin Fabricator shall be used in the final resin coat. The outside surfaces of tanks, which will be installed outdoors, shall be painted with an opaque (color) resin coat after approval has been obtained. 3.1.8 Cut edges exposed to the chemical environment shall be coated with resin. The resin used shall be designated in the purchase specifications and must contain paraffin to assure adequate surface cure. 3.1.9 The machine facing of the back of hand lay-up flanges is not permitted. All boltholes shall be spot faced for AE size washers if required. 3.1.10 Flange drilling on pipe connections shall be in accordance with ANSI P-16.5 for 150 PSI pressure class. Flange thickness to be per ASTM D3299, Table 4, for 25 PSI pressure rating. 3.1.11 All nozzles, 4" and smaller, shall be reinforced with gussets. 3.1.12 Boltholes in flanged nozzles are to straddle the vertical centerline. Tolerance bolt holes location and in diameter of bolt circle shall be plus or minus 1/8". 3.1.13 On all flanged joints use minimum 1/8" thick full-faced elastomeric gaskets having Shore A Durometer hardness of 40 to 60. 3.1.14 Reinforcement of nozzle and manhole openings in vessel walls shall be in accordance with the requirement of Appendix 1-4 of Section X of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. The reinforcement pad shall consist of plies of mat. Rev 102408.1000.34 3.1.15 Threaded couplings, when specified, shall be FRP, either vinyl ester or epoxy. PVC or CPVC couplings will not be used. 3.2 PRODUCTION QUALITY CONTROL AND ASSURANCE 3.2.1 Quality Assurance Plan: The Fabricator shall at all times maintain and follow a comprehensive quality assurance plan which is available for inspection by the Purchaser. Purchaser reserves the right to increase items to quality assurance plan as desired with notification to the Fabricator prior to order. 3.2.2 Quality Assurance Manager: The QA Manager shall be responsible for evaluating all Quality Control Inspection techniques, verifying all tanks or products meet the minimum quality standards, performing audits of outgoing product and testing raw materials for quality and accuracy of component specifications. This office shall receive the latest copies of all drawings and perform all required Quality Assurance inspections and/or verifications and complete all associated documentation. The QA Manager shall not report directly to the production department. 3.2.3 Raw Material Control: 3.2.3.1 It is the Fabricator's responsibility to maintain proper records demonstrating that the correct materials were used for each vessel. Such records shall be available to Purchaser upon request and include batch numbers of resins and glass reinforcements used. 3.2.3.2 Resins shall be tested for laminate cure and peak exothermic temperature prior to use as per ASTM 3299, D4097, PS 15-69 and/or RTP -1 where applicable and/or requested by the Purchaser prior to fabrication. 3.2.4 Environmental Controls 3.2.4.1 Vessels shall be completely fabricated indoors. Exceptions shall be allowed only with the consent of the Purchaser. 3.2.5 Quality Control of Fabrication: 3.2.5.1 Thickness Inspection: 3.2.5.1.1 Individual sub -assemblies such as the top, bottom and sidewall of vessels shall be verified for thickness after the part is complete. 3.2.5.1.2 Thickness shall be verified and recorded using a Panometric ultrasonic thickness gage, or equal. 3.2.5.2 Visual Inspection: 3.2.5.2.1 Visual inspection shall be per ASTM 2563, Table I, Level II for the corrosion liner and Level III for the structural layers. Rev 102408.1000.34 3.2.5.2.2 Any repair or rework completed to allow a part to meet the visual acceptance criteria shall be noted on the quality control documents. 3.2.5.2.3 Following any rework or repair, the part shall be fully re -inspected. 3.2.5.3 Resin / Glass Ratios: 3.2.5.3.1 Resin to glass ratios will be calculated for each major sub- assembly. 3.2.5.3.2 Resin to glass ratios shall be monitored during part fabrication in real time and reportable via computer printout. 3.2.5.4 Fittings and Accessories 3.2.5.4.1 The tank shall be marked with an orientation line and the location of all nozzles, manways and accessories to be installed as per the design specifications. The orientation and location marks shall be verified for accuracy by the Quality Assurance Manager before any cuts are made. 3.2.5.4.2 After all accessories are installed, but prior to permanently laminating them to the tank, a Quality Assurance Manager shall verify the size, orientation, elevation, projection, and levelness of all accessories, annotating the inspection on the quality control documents, noting any defects or required reworks as applicable. 3.2.5.5 Testing: 3.2.5.5.1 All equipment fabricated to this specification shall be cured to the minimum Barcol hardness, as tested in accordance with ASTM D2583, should exceed 90% of the resin Fabricator's recommended minimum cure hardness. 3.2.5.5.2 Laminates must pass the visual inspection testing 3.2.5.5.3 All vessels shall be hydrotested for a minimum of 4 hours, filled to the top of the overflow. 3.2.5.5.4 Physical property testing of representative samples of similar laminates will be provided to the Purchaser and, upon request prior to fabrication, actual samples may be tested to verify the laminate meets the required design criteria. Testing shall be performed by third party laboratory regularly engaged in tests of composite materials. 3.3 CUSTOMER INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE 3.3.1 The Purchaser shall reserve the right to require proof of compliance with this specification from the Fabricator. Rev 102408.1000.34 3.3.2 A clearance for shipment shall not relieve the Fabricator of responsibility as to performance guarantees, quality of materials and workmanship and dimensional conformity with drawings. 3.3.3 Each cutout from equipment laminate shall be marked to identify the equipment number and sample location and retained for inspection. Cutouts are the property of the purchaser and shall be retained by Fabricator at least six months after shipment. 3.3.4 THIRD PARTY INSPECTIONS — The Purchaser shall be permitted to hire a third party agent to perform inspections prior to, during and after fabrication of the vessel at the site of fabrication. Purchase shall inform Fabricator of its intent and Fabricator will coordinate and notify the inspector of the production schedule. Responsibilities of the third party inspector include: 3.3.4.1 Review of specifications with Fabricator 3.3.4.2 Verification of materials used in the fabrication 3.3.4.3 Review of Fabricators quality control procedures 3.3.4.4 Determination of Inspection and Testing Plan acceptable to Purchaser 3.3.4.5 Implementation of the Inspection and Testing Plan 3.3.4.6 Issuance of Certificate of Specification Compliance 3.4 INSTALLATION 3.4.1 Vessels shall be installed by a firm that is a licensed contractor and has installed at least three other fiberglass tanks for chemical service. 3.4.2 Purchaser shall follow manufacturer's recommendations for installation of the vessel. Failure to do so may cause damage to the vessel or personnel and may possibly void the manufacturer's warranty. Rev 102408.1000.34 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 13310 ULTRASONIC LEVEL MEASUREMENT 1. GENERAL 1.1. Scope -This specification outlines the requirements for two complete ultrasonic level measurement systems for installation in the alum storage tanks at the Marshall Street and Northeast Water Reclamation Facilities (WRF). Each system will consist on a display/transmitter mounted adjacent to the tanks as required in the applicable electrical drawings and two ultrasonic transducers mounted on the top of the tanks. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. Transmitter/Display: The multi-purpose level transmitter shall be a microprocessor based echo -time measuring type providing an electronic output signal proportional to the level of material in the tank along with a visual display 2.1.1. Enclosure: Type 4X NEMA 4X /IP65 polycarbonate 2.1.2. Power supply: universal 100-230 VAC +/- 15% @ 50/60 Hz 2.1.3. Operating temperature: —5F to 122F. 2.1.4. Outputs: 6 relays (4 form A, 2 form C). Two isolated 0-20mA or 4-20mA into750 ohms 2.1.5. Inputs other than transducers: One 0-20mA or 4-20mA, from alternate device scalable, 2 discrete contacts. 2.1.6. Accuracy: 0.25% of measurement or 2mm (.08") whichever is greater 2.1.7. Resolution: 0.1% of measurement or 2mm (.08") whichever is greater 2.1.8. Communication: RS -232 running Modbus RTU or ASCII via RJ -11 connector RS -485 running Modbus RTU or ASCII via terminal Blocks Compatible via option to Allan -Bradley remote I/O or DeviceNet, Or Profibus - DP 2.1.9. Programming: Push Buttons from outside the enclosure without opening the enclosure or via PC using Manufacturers optionally available software. 2.1.10. Indication: Multifield backlit LCD 2.1.11. Range 1-50ft dependent on transducer 2.1.12. Cable: Transducer and mA outputs: 2 —3 copper conductors, twisted with shield and drain wire 2.1.13. Approvals: CE, FM, CSA(US/C), UL Listed, CSA Classl, Div. 2,GroupA,B,C, and D; Class II,Div.2, Group F G, Class III 2.1.14. The transmitter shall be a Milltronics Hydroranger 200 as manufactured by Siemens or approved equal. 2.2. Ultrasonic Transducer 2.2.1. The range of the transducer shall be 1 to 25 feet. 2.2.2. Transducer construction shall be Kynar, immersible 2.2.3. Process connection shall be 1" NPT 2.2.4. Built in temperature compensation 2.2.5. Operating temperature shall be —40F to 203F 2.2.6. Beam Angle 6 degrees 2.2.7. Cable: up to 1200 feet, 2 —3 copper conductors, twisted with shield and drain wire when used with HydroRanger 200 2.2.8. Approvals: FM Class 1 Div. 2 Group A,B, C & D, Class II Div. 2, Group E, F, and G, Class III 2.2.9. The transducers shall be Milltronics Echomax XRS-5 as manufactured by Siemens or approved equivalent 3. INSTALLATION 3.1. All components of the ultrasonic level measurement system shall be install per manufacturer's instructions and as detailed in the project drawings. 3.2. The system supplier shall provide setup and training to plant staff in maintenance and operation of the system. 3.3. The system shall include any cables or programming devices needed to setup, troubleshoot and maintain the system. END OF SECTION SECTION 15400 EYE WASH/SHOWER STATIONS 1. GENERAL 1.1. Scope: This section outlines the requirements for the installation of four (4) combination eyewash drench shower stations at the Marshall Street and Northeast Water Reclamation Facilities (WRF). Two stations will be installed near each alum feed facility as shown on project drawings. Each station shall be equipped with an emergency flow activated signaling system providing a local alarm and signal to plant SCADA systems. 1.2. Standards: All fixtures and installations shall meet the requirements of ANSI/ISEA Z358.1-2014 Standard of Emergency Eyewashes and Shower Equipment. 2. MATERIALS 2.1. Combination Eyewash Drench Shower 2.1.1. Galvanized steel piping with yellow coating 2.1.2. Ball valves: Stay open chrome plated brass valves for shower and eyewash 2.1.3. Plastic shower head with stainless steel shroud 2.1.4. Plastic bowl 2.1.5. Stainless steel activation handle 2.1.6. Combination eyewash drench shower shall be Combination S19314 Series as manufactured by the Bradley Corporation or approved equal 2.2. Emergency Signaling System 2.2.1. The signaling system shall be made for direct installation on the combination eyewash drench shower. 2.2.2. Enclosure to meet NEMA 3R requirement for outdoor installation. 2.2.3. Pipe Size:1-1/4" NTP 2.2.4. Automatic visual and audible alarm with alarm silence option. 2.2.5. Voltage: 90-265 VAC 50-60 HZ, Max 70 Watts, Max 3.0 Amps 2.2.6. Flow switch activation 2.2.7. Emergency signaling system to be S19 -323D as manufactured by the Bradley Corporation or approved equal. 3. EXECUTION 3.1. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as specified in the project drawings and specifications. -END OF SECTION - 3/28/18 15400-1 Eyewash Stations SECTION 16050 ELECTRICAL — GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the City of Clearwater's Marshall Street and NE WRF Alum Feed System Improvement project as hereinafter specified and shown on the Drawings. B. The work, apparatus and materials, which shall be furnished under these Specifications and accompanying Drawings, shall include all items listed hereinafter and/or shown on the Drawings. Certain equipment, which will require wiring thereto and/or complete installation, is indicated. All materials necessary for the complete installation shall be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR to provide complete power, instrumentation, wiring and control systems as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified herein. C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install the necessary cables, protective devices, conductors, supports, raceways, exterior electrical system, etc., to serve loads as indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. D. The work shall include complete testing of all equipment and wiring at the completion of the work and making any minor connection changes or adjustments necessary for the proper functioning of the system and equipment. All workmanship shall be of the highest quality; sub -standard work will be rejected. E. It is the intent of these Specifications that the electrical system shall be suitable in every way for the service required. All material and all work, which may be reasonably implied as being incidental to the work of this Section, shall be furnished at no extra cost. F. Furnish and install a complete system of conduit as herein specified and shown on the drawings. 1.02 CODES, INSPECTION AND FEES A. All material and installation shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and all applicable national, local and state codes, laws and ordinances. 16050-1 B. Pay all fees required for permits and inspections. 1.03 TESTS A. Test all systems and repair or replace all defective work. Make all necessary adjustments to the systems and instruct OWNER's personnel in the proper operation of the systems. B. The following minimum tests and checks shall be made prior to the energizing of electrical equipment. Test shall be by the CONTRACTOR and a certified test report shall be submitted providing all test results and stating that the equipment meets and operates in accordance with the Manufacturer's and job specifications, and that equipment and installation conforms to all applicable Standards and Specifications: 1. Test all 600 -volt wire insulation with a megohm meter after installation. Make tests at not less than 1000 volts. Submit a written test report of the results to the engineer. 2. Mechanical inspection of all circuit breakers to assure proper operation. C. The Engineer shall be notified forty-eight (48) hours before tests are made to enable the Owner to have designated personnel present. 1.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. All cutting and patching shall be done in a thoroughly workmanlike manner. 1.05 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS A. The Drawings are not intended to show exact locations of conduit runs. B. All three-phase circuits shall be run in separate conduits unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. C. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, conduit shown exposed shall be installed exposed; conduit shown concealed shall be installed concealed. D. Where circuits are shown as "home -runs," all necessary fittings and boxes shall be provided for a complete raceway installation. E. The CONTRACTOR shall harmonize the work of the different trades so that interferences between conduits, piping, equipment, architectural and structural work will be avoided. All necessary offsets shall be furnished so as to take up a minimum space and all such offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish this shall be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR without additional expense to the Owner. In case interference develops, the 16050-2 Owner's authorized representative is to decide which equipment, piping, etc., must be relocated, regardless of which was installed first. F. The locations of equipment, outlets, and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be as approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain in the field all information relevant to the placing of electrical work and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner. G. Circuit layouts shown are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other installation details. Furnish all labor and materials necessary to install and place in satisfactory operation all power, lighting, and other electrical systems shown. Additional circuits shall be installed wherever needed to conform to the specific requirements of the equipment. H. The ratings of motors and other electrically operated devices together with the size shown for their branch circuit conductors and conduits are approximate only and are indicative of the probable power requirements insofar as they can be determined in advance of the purchase of equipment. I. All connections to equipment shall be made as shown, specified and directed and in accordance with the approved shop drawings, regardless of the number of conductors shown on the Electrical Drawings. 1.06 RECORD DRAWINGS A. As the work progresses, legibly record all field changes on a set of project Contract Drawings. When the project is complete, furnish a complete set of reproducible "As -built" drawings for the Project Record Documents. 1.07 COMPONENT INTERCONNECTIONS A. Component equipment furnished under this Specification will not be furnished as integrated systems. B. Analyze all systems components and their shop drawings; identify all terminals and prepare drawings or wiring tables necessary for component interconnection. 1.08 SHOP DRAWINGS A. As specified under other Sections, shop drawings shall be submitted for approval for all materials, equipment, apparatus, and other items as required by the Engineer. B. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following equipment: 1. Panelboard 2. Circuit Breakers 3. Allen Bradley 24V DC Input Card 16050-3 4. Light Fixtures 5. Junction Boxes 6. Switches 7. Receptacles 8. Conductors 9. Conduit C. The Manufacturer's name and product designation and catalog cutsheets shall be submitted for the following material: 1. Conduit D. Prior to submittal by the CONTRACTOR, all shop drawings shall be checked for accuracy and contract requirements. Shop drawings shall bear the date checked and shall be accompanied by a statement that the shop drawings have been examined for conformity to Specifications and Drawings. This statement shall also list all discrepancies with the Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings not so checked and noted shall be returned. E. The Engineer's check shall be only for conformance with the design concept of the project and compliance with the Specifications and Drawings. The responsibility of, or the necessity of, furnishing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications and Drawings, which may not be indicated on the shop drawings, is included under the work of this Section. F. The responsibility for all dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site and for coordination of this work with the work of all other trades is also included under the work of this Section. G. No material shall be ordered or shop work started until the Engineer's approval of shop drawings has been given. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide a warranty for all the electrical equipment in accordance with the requirements of other Sections. Under no circumstances shall the warranty be for less than one year starting from substantial completion. PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 16050-4 SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. All work shall be executed in a neat and workmanlike manner by experienced and capable electricians so as to present a neat installation upon completion. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical work shall be performed in accordance with the current standards of the electrical trades. The provisions of the NEC and existing local requirements shall comprise the minimum acceptable standards of electrical work. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING, & ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment and material shall be suitably delivered and stored in the original containers, but shall be readily accessible for inspection. All items subject to moisture damage shall be stored in dry spaces. All material and equipment shall be protected against dirt, dust, water and chemical or mechanical injury, vandalism and theft. Upon completion of the work all equipment and materials shall be cleaned thoroughly, polished and finished in a condition satisfactory to the OWNER. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT A. All equipment and materials shall be new and shall bear the manufacturer's name, trade name, and the UL label. In cases where a standard has been established for a particular material, the material shall be so labeled. The equipment to be furnished shall be essentially the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of the required type of equipment for this type of work and shall be the manufacturer's latest approved design. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Clamps, screws, fasteners and support devices shall be of noncorrosive metal. 16100-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangements of the electrical work. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully examine the Drawings and shall ascertain that the equipment and accessories will be properly located and readily accessible. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Equipment and appurtenances furnished by various manufacturers shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and approved wiring diagrams for type and capacity of each piece of equipment used. These instructions shall be considered as part of these Specifications. Any OWNER -furnished equipment shall be connected by the CONTRACTOR, including all necessary cords and plugs. B. Dimensions shown on the drawings are based on the information provided by the manufacturer for specific models indicated. The contractor shall be responsible for insuring proper clearances, coordination with other equipment, etc. for any substitutions to the equipment used as the basis for the design. END OF SECTION 16100-2 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. All exposed, exterior conduit shall be rigid aluminum, rigid threaded conduit unless otherwise indicated or shown. B. All conduit installed below grade shall be rigid non-metallic heavy wall schedule 80 conduit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Metallic Conduit and Fittings : Electric metallic conduit shall be standard, heavy -wall rigid aluminum conduit conforming to Federal Specifications. The use of dissimilar metals shall be avoided throughout the system. Installation methods of metallic conduit shall be in accordance with Sections 348-4 through 348-13 of the NEC. B. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit and Fittings : Rigid non-metallic conduit and fittings of heavy wall polyvinyl chloride (PVC) meeting ASTM Specification D 1785, approved by UL for the specific purpose, may be used in locations not prohibited by the NEC Section 347-3. When equipment grounding is required by Article 250 of the NEC, a separate grounding conductor shall be installed in the conduit. Installation methods of rigid non-metallic conduit shall conform to Section 347-5 through 347-15 of the NEC. Supports shall be in accordance with Table 347-8. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Exposed conduit shall run parallel. Concealed conduits shall be run in a direct line with long sweep bends and offsets. Conduit shall be continuous and installed in such a manner that the system shall be electrically continuous throughout. Conduit ends shall be capped during construction. The ends of all conduits shall be carefully reamed free from burrs after threading and before installation. All cuts shall be made square. All joints shall be made up tight. Care shall be taken to see that all control and power conduit runs form a permanent and continuous ground connection point. 16110-1 B. The Contractor shall permanently and effectively ground service neutral and all raceways, devices, and utilized equipment in accordance with the requirements of the NEC, and as shown or required. All grounding electrodes shall have rigid clamp jaws and be UL listed for the application. A separate ground wire shall be provided in all control and power raceways. C. Conduit stubs shall be located to conform to location of connection boxes on motors and/or other equipment served. Traps in conduit runs shall be avoided. D. Conductors shall be installed in a workmanlike manner. Damage to insulation or a reduction of the wire size when pulled into the conduit shall be avoided. E. All areas of the project are considered to be wet locations and construction within these areas shall be moisture and weather resistant. Work below grade, on grade, or beneath slabs shall be waterproof. F. Electrical work shall not rest upon, be supported by or hung from ductwork, piping or equipment. Adequate supports shall be provided to assure that this is achieved. G. Boxes, conduit, hangers, panels, etc., shall be fastened to steel by machine bolts and nuts, and by expansion bolts in concrete. Wood or composition plugs shall not be used. H. Where installations pass through walls, slabs, or other structures, all cutting shall be accomplished without damage to the structure. Boring and cutting shall be done with proper equipment and without delivering excessive vibration or shock to the structure. I. The contractor shall install long radius 90 degree bends on all changes of direction in conduits. Factory 90 degree bends will not be accepted. J. Transition from the above -grade rigid metallic conduit, which includes the first 90° elbow, to the below grade nonmetallic conduit shall be accomplished with a threaded adapter. K. All aluminum surfaces coming into direct contact with concrete shall be coated/protected at the point of contact to prevent corrosion. END OF SECTION 16110-2 SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section includes the furnishing, installation, and connection of all low voltage and power wiring. This shall include all wires and cables utilized for controls. Conductors specified for low voltage controls shall be coordinated with and approved by equipment manufacturers. B. Control wiring specified herein shall be installed and connected by the Electrical Contractor to perform the functions specified in other sections of these specifications. C. REFERENCE STANDARDS: The following specifications and standards, except as hereinafter modified, are incorporated herein by reference and form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the references thereto. Except where a specific date is given, the issue in effect (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata) on the date of Invitation for Bids shall be applicable. In text such specifications and standards are referred to by basic designation only. 1) Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.) J -C -30A(1) - Cable and Wire Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation) 1111 -I -595C - Insulation Tape, Electrical, Pressure Sensitive Adhesive, Plastic 2) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications: No. 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) WIRES AND CABLES 3) Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc (UL) Publications: No. 83 Thermoplastic — Insulated Wires No. 493 Thermoplastic — Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cables No. 486 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Conductors shall consist of annealed copper wire having a minimum of 98% conductivity and shall be sized and insulated or isolated in accordance with the NEC for the current and voltage of the individual circuit. All conductors, unless specifically noted, shall have type "THWN", 75 degrees F, 600 Volt insulation. 16120-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All conductors shall be coded throughout, using different colors for phases, white for neutral (white with other color stripe for neutral of a different voltage system) and green for ground. The same color code for a particular phase or part of a circuit shall be run with the same conductor throughout the job. Colors used for each voltage system shall be different. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger may be black in color but shall be identified with colored tape in all outlet, junction or pull boxes and at the terminals of the equipment. Phase 120/240V, 1PH, System A Black B Red Neutral White Ground Green B. All wires in cabinets, boxes, panels, pull and junction boxes shall be trained neatly and tied. C. All wires and cables, larger than No. 12 AWG, shall be continuous from origin to destination without splices unless written permission is given by the ENGINEER. D. Conductors shall be sized in accordance with NEC requirements. No conductor shall be smaller than No. 12 AWG, except control and signal circuit conductors which may be No. 14 AWG, unless otherwise specified on the drawings. 3.02 TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES A. Power Conductors: Terminations shall be die type or set screw type pressure connectors as specified. Splices (where allowed) shall be die type compression connector and waterproof with heat shrink boot or epoxy filling. B. Control Conductors: Termination on saddle -type terminals shall be wired directly with a maximum of two conductors per termination. Termination on screw type terminals shall be made with a maximum of two spade connectors. C. Instrumentation Signal Conductors: Terminations permitted shall be typical of control conductors. Splices are allowed at instrumentation terminal boxes only. D. Splices (of any type) shall not be allowed. All conductors shall be continuous from termination point to termination point. END OF SECTION 16120-2 SECTION 16130 BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. Boxes shall be provided where required by the NEC and other portions of this division of Specifications. 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Where more than one feeder passes through a junction box or pull box, the conductors shall be identified with electrical characteristics, system designation, source and destination. Barriers shall be provided where required by Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Boxes shall conform to Federal Specification W-5-800 and sized in accordance with Section 370 of the NEC. B. All device outlet boxes and fittings used in the Chlorine and Fluoride Equipment Rooms shall be corrosion resistant, equal to Bell #5322. All other device outlet boxes and fittings including all lighting fixture outlet boxes shall be constructed of galvanized metal and shall be as manufactured by Steel City or equal. C. Outlet boxes at a minimum shall be 4 -inch square not less than 1 1/2- inch deep. Extra large boxes shall be used in accordance with the NEC where necessary to prevent undue crowding of wires. Gang boxes shall be used for gang switches. D. Pullboxes shall be constructed of code gauge metal and shall be galvanized. Any box that is tack or spot welded shall be galvanized after fabrication. All boxes shall bear the UL label. Flush boxes shall be equal to Columbia, Type "FC", surface type shall be Type "SC" or equal. E. Cast metal boxes shall be equal to those manufactured by Crouse -Hinds or Pyle National. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Junction and pull boxes shall be installed where required by the NEC and where necessary to facilitate pulling of wire or cable. Consideration shall be given for all sizes of wire and cable, number of bends in raceways and conductor support requirements in 16130-1 vertical raceways. Maximum distance between terminations at junction or pull boxes, cabinets or other points of termination shall not exceed 100 feet for straight horizontal runs. This length shall be decreased by 50 feet for each 90 degree bend. B. Minimum size of junction and pullboxes shall be determined by the NEC, and by minimum raceway spacing requirements. The minimum raceway spacing shall be such as to allow 1/4 inch space between knockouts. C. When splices and taps are to be made in junction or pull boxes, the minimum dimensions for straight through pull shall be 12 times the diameter of largest raceway. For angle pulls, the distance between raceway entry and opposite wall shall be 10 times the diameter of largest raceway, plus the sum of diameters of all other raceways entering the same wall. Additionally for angle pulls, the distance between the raceway entries enclosing the same conductor shall be 10 times the diameter of the largest raceway. Wires in junction or pull boxes that are spliced shall be covered with fire -proofing as specified below. D. Entries for raceways enclosing the same conductors shall provide the longest sweep or radius for the conductors. E. Junction and pull boxes shall be securely supported to the structure, or to a structural member. Raceways shall carry no weight of the box. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported. END OF SECTION 16130-2 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provision of switches, receptacles and control stations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A. Devices in each category shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Shop drawings submittal shall include manufacturer's name and catalog number for each type of device and device plate. Unless noted, all devices shall be ivory in color. B. Light switches shall be rated 20 Ampere AC and mounted 4 feet above the floor elevation, unless otherwise noted. C. Receptacle Outlets: Convenience outlets shall be duplex grounding, 20 -ampere (NEMA type 5-20R) ivory for nominal 120 Volt service, unless otherwise noted. D. G.F.I. Outlets: Outlets shall be duplex grounding, G.F.I. type, 20 -ampere (NEMA type 5- 20R) ivory for nominal 120 Volt service, unless otherwise noted. E. Device Plate: Device plates and screws for switches shall be stainless steel or aluminum. Device plates shall be of gang sizes and configurations required by application. Device covers for receptacles in located at the Alum Feed Structure shall be Bell #5146-0 or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Contractor to provide testing equipment to test each ground fault interrupter for proper operation. Submit test results to Engineer for approval. B. Prior to installation, the wiring devices shall be stored on the job site in the original labeled cartons. The devices shall be installed in the outlets as soon as possible after the wire is pulled. The devices shall then be temporarily covered using the device packaging material, until finishing and painting operations re completed. Devices and service plates that are stained, paint splashed, or scratched shall be replaced. END OF SECTION 16140-1 SECTION 16170 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Panelboard 'AF' shall be furnished with a main circuit breaker. This circuit breaker, and the other branch circuit breakers required shall meet the following requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESSORIES A. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers for all branch circuits shall be molded -case unit breakers with thermal -magnetic trips designed to open all phases simultaneously under overload and/or fault conditions. Breakers shall be of adequate rating for the actual duty required. The breaker shall have quick -make, quick -break, toggle mechanism, inverse - time trip characteristics, and shall be trip -free on overload or short-circuit. Automatic release is to be secured by a bimetallic thermal element releasing the mechanism latch. In addition, a magnetic armature shall be provided to trip the breaker instantaneously for short circuit currents above the overload range. Automatic tripping shall be indicated by a handle position between the manual OFF and ON position. The trip mechanism shall be a combination thermal -magnetic type. Thermal elements shall inverse time characteristics for overload conditions and magnetic trip element shall protect against short circuits by providing instantaneous trip. Main and Emergency circuit breakers shall be mechanically interlocked so that the two breakers may not both be in the "ON" position simulatenously. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install overcurrent protective devices as recommended by the manufacturer, required by Code, and as shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION 16170-1 SECTION 16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all materials and equipment and performing all labor and services necessary for the complete installation of lighting fixtures, including all related systems and accessories, as shown on the drawing or hereinafter specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Materials. 1. Lighting Fixtures shall be as specified in the lighting fixture schedule on the drawings and as specified herein. 2. All fixtures shall bear the U.L. label. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixture shall be installed as indicated on drawings. B. Fasten fixtures securely to provide adequate support. C. Ensure that lighting fixtures are plumb. END OF SECTION 16500-1 SECTION 16745 FIBER OPTIC CABLE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 Work Included: A. The CONTRACTOR shall supply and install fiber optic cable in accordance with the drawings and specifications. B. The fiber optic cable shall be installed as shown in the drawings. After delivery to the site, but prior to installation, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the PROFESSIONAL the fiber optic cable is ready for inspection and testing. Fiber optic cable found to be defective, failing to pass the tests designated herein (using an optical time domain reflectometer), shall be replaced at no additional cost to the OWNER. C. Within five working days of delivery (Monday through Friday, non -State Holidays, 8 AM to 5 PM), the PROFESSIONAL will inspect and witness the test of the fiber optic cable. D. After installation, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the PROFESSIONAL the fiber optic cable is again ready for inspection and testing. Fiber optic cable found to be defective, failing to pass the tests designated herein, shall be replaced at no additional cost to the OWNER. 1.02 Submittals: A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings and certificates of compliance for the material specified herein, and have them approved by the PROFESSIONAL before procurement, fabrication, or delivery of the items to the job site. Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will be returned without review. Submittals shall include the supplier's (manufacturer's) name, trade name, catalog model or number, nameplate data, size, layout dimensions, capacity, applicable federal, industry, and technical society publication references, and other information necessary to establish compliance of each item the CONTRACTOR proposes to furnish. 1. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall include the length of fiber optic cable per spool and other items that must be shown to assure a coordinated installation. If the fiber optic cable is disapproved, the shop drawings shall be revised to show acceptable materials and/or equipment and shall be resubmitted. Submit to the PROFESSIONAL, shop drawings for fiber optic 16745-1 cable, breakout boxes, and appurtenances, and proposed plan of pull box locations. 2. Standards Compliance: When materials or equipment must conform to the standards of organizations such as the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Water Works Association (AWWA), the Chlorine Institute, the Hydraulics Institute, National Electrical Code (NEC), and Underwriter's Laboratories (UL), proof of such conformance, in the form of a standard label or certificate of compliance from the supplier (manufacturer), shall be submitted for approval. The certificate shall identify the supplier, the product, and the referenced standard and shall simply state the supplier certifies that the product conforms to all requirements of the specifications and of the referenced standards listed. Fiber optic cable shall be suitable for underground use and conform to applicable sections of the following standards: a. ICEA-S-83-596. b. ICEA-S-104-696. c. GR -409 -CORE. d. TIA-568. e. TIA-598. f. NECA/FOA 301-2009. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the PROJECT MANAGER and PROFESSIONAL, supplier's certificates of compliance for materials. 3. Certified Test Reports: Before delivery of materials and equipment, certified copies of all test reports specified in these specifications or referenced standards shall be submitted for approval. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for review the name of the supplier, identifying trade name and catalog cuts. Information to be included: a. Maximum attenuation dB/Km @ 850/1300 nm b. Bandwidth MHz -Km @ 850/1300 nm c. Minimum bend radius 1.03 Delivery and Storage: The fiber optic cable shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in strict accordance with the supplier's recommendations, and as approved by the PROFESSIONAL and PROJECT MANAGER. Items damaged or defective in 16745-2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 the opinion of the PROFESSIONAL and/or PROJECT MANAGER shall be replaced at CON IRACTOR's cost. 1.04 Materials and Workmanship: All materials shall be new, unused, and suitable for the service intended. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality, performed by skilled and experienced workers. Materials and equipment shall be cataloged, standard products of supplier regularly engaged in the production of such materials or equipment and shall be supplier's latest design that complies with the specification requirements. Materials and equipment shall duplicate items that have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use at least five (5) years. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single supplier. Each item of equipment shall have the supplier's name, address, model number, and serial number on the nameplate securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable. 1.05 Supplier's (Manufacturer's) Recommendations: Installation procedures shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the supplier (manufacturer) of the materials and/or equipment. Printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the PROJECT MANAGER and PROFESSIONAL prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material. 1.06 Warranties: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, unless otherwise noted herein, a full twenty (20) year express warranty for all equipment and/or materials furnished. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 Fiber Optic Cable: A. The fiber optic cable shall contain six (6) optical fibers surrounded by dielectric strength members and shall have an overall polyurethane outer jacket. The fiber optic cable shall be of tight bundle construction suitable for underground installation in conduit. The fiber optic cable shall be suitable for breakout connections and include a ripcord to assist in jacket removal. Individual optical fiber size shall be 62.5/125/900 micron (core/clad/buffer) and suitable for data communications. Additional fiber optic cable requirements are: 1. Maximum attenuation - 3.5 dB/Km at 850 nm 1.5 dB/Km at 1300 nm 2. Fiber category OM1 16745-3 3. Minimum Overfill (OFL) Bandwidth — 200 MHz * Km at 850 nm 500 MHz * Km at 1300 nm 4. Minimum Effective Modal Bandwidth (EMB) — 220 MHz * Km at 850 nm 5. EI/TIA - 598 color coding for optical fibers. 6. Maximum Tensile Strength, long term 130 lbf. 7. Maximum Tensile Strength, short term 400 lbf. 8. Minimum cable bend radius : installation — 3.8 inches. 9. Minimum cable bend radius : operation — 1.9 inches. 2.02 Approved Products (Manufacturers): Products that are specified by supplier (manufacturer), trade name or catalog number establish a standard of quality. Substitution of equal suppliers will not be allowed unless specifically stated herein, and shall be subject to review and approval by the PROFESSIONAL and the PROJECT MANAGER. Approved products include Optical Cable Corporation (OCC) Tactical Tight - Buffered Cable, 6 F, 62.5 um multimode (OM1). OCC Part Number D- 006CWST5KM or equal by Siecor, Corning or Lucent with an equivalent warranty. 2.03 Fiber Optic Cable Connectors A. The tested dB loss at any connector shall not exceed 0.5 dB. Connectors found to have a loss higher than specified will be replaced. Connector losses greater than (>) 0.5 dB on any new fiber installed under this contract shall be replaced by the contractor at no cost to the owner. B. The selection of the Fiber Optic Cable Connector to be employed for each application shall be based on the fiber type and utilization type as follows : 1. All multimode connections at existing fiber optic patch panels or for existing fibers in need of repair or found to have no existing connector shall be via ST type connector. a. S T Connectors shall be comprised of a 2.5 mm ceramic ferrule, or composite connector keyed body to 16745-4 accommodate a field bayonet connection. b. The maximum attenuation loss per ST connector shall be 0.3 dB. c. PC polish for < -30dB back reflection 2. Multimode connections to new Stratix 2000 media converters shall be via LC type connector. a. LC connectors shall not be field installed, but shall only be supplied as a component of a factory fabricated patch cord. b. The maximum attenuation loss per LC connector shall be 0.5 dB. c. APC polish with < -65 dB back reflection. d. The contractor shall coordinate all LC connector requirements with media converter manufacturer to insure proper installation. 3. Fiber optic cable connections for all new fiber shall be via factory fabricated connector with integral pigtail. a. Fabricated connectors shall be Closet Connector Housing (CCH) Panels, with six (6) adapters per panel. b. Fiber pigtails shall be 3 meters in length. c. Adapters shall be simplex ST type with UPC polish for 62.5 um fiber. d. Each fiber of any pigtail assembly shall be color coded in accordance with TIA/EIA-598-B to match the color codes of the fiber on to which they are to be installed. e. CCH Panels shall be Corning part number CCH-CP06-5T- P03KH, There shall be no substitutions allowed. 2.04 Fiber Optic Patch Panels A. When directed by the contract documents, the contractor shall provide a Fiber Optic Panel. 16745-5 1. The patch panels to be installed shall accommodate one (1) CCH Panel as specified in section 2.03.A.3. 2. The fiber optic patch panels shall accommodate the number of splice trays as required. 3. The fiber optic patch panels shall be Corning SPH -01P. 2.05 Fiber Optic Splice Trays A. The Fiber Optic splice trays shall be compatible with the patch panels as specified in 2.04 and shall be Corning Type 2R or 4R as required. 2.06 Patch cords A. Utilize factory pre -terminated assemblies that adhere to the applicable cable, cordage and fiber specifications stated within these technical specifications. All connectors used shall meet the requirements of Section 2.03. B. Patch cords for existing Allen Bradley Stratix 8300 Industrial Ethernet Switch shall be SC to ST multimode (Contractor to field verify SC connection on Stratix 8300. C. Patch cords for connection from patch panels to new Allen Bradley Stratix 2000 switches shall have a paired ST connectors on patch panel end and paired LC connectors on switch end. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 Pre -Shipment Testing: Prior to shipment, the equipment shall be tested in the factory for conformance with these specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a certified report that such testing has been conducted prior to shipment. 3.02 Delivery: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and deliver the material to the installation site(s) as noted on the drawings. 3.03 Installation of Fiber Optic Cables A. All underground optical fiber cable shall be installed in existing ductbank (except where noted otherwise o the drawings). The CONTRACTOR shall use the following methods for placement of the fiber optic cable. 1. Pulling 2. High Air Speed Blowing (HASB) or 16745-6 3. Other methods approved by the PROFESSIONAL B. The cable ends shall be kept sealed at all times during installation, using an approved duct plug or cable end cap. The caps shall be of the size and installed such that they are not easily removed and they assure a complete seal of the end of the cable up until splicing/termination takes place. Tape shall not be used to seal the cable end. C. CONTRACTOR shall not exceed the maximum pulling tension rating of the fiber optic cable. The CONTRACTOR shall consult the cable manufacturer's specifications for guidelines on tension rating and lubricant use. D. The CONTRACTOR shall not bend the fiber optic cable or individual optical fibers to less than the minimum bend radius, as recommended by the supplier, at any time during installation and handling. The fiber optic cable shall be installed as to minimize the need for splice/termination boxes. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval by the PROFESSIONAL, the proposed cable installation plan detailing the equipment, procedures and order of work. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for and replace any fiber optic cable damaged during installation and prior to final completion. E. All existing conduit to be reused shall be cleaned prior to the installation of the fiber optic cable by CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall determine if the existing conduit to be reused is suitable for the fiber optic cable installation prior to attempting any cable pull. 3.04 Cable Pulling Lubricant A. Pulling lubricant shall be used to minimize pulling tension and prevent sheath damage when pulling cables into the conduit. Lubricant shall be applied to the cable sheath with a lubricator. When pulling has been completed, the exposed cable ends shall be wiped clean of lubricant. B. Lubricants shall be compatible with and intended for use with polyurethane -sheathed cables. Soap and grease type lubricants are not allowed. 3.05 CABLE PULLING A. Pulling lines shall be attached to both cable ends when cable is destined for bi-directional pull, and fitted with factory -installed pulling eyes where possible. Cables not equipped with a pulling eye shall have the pulling line 16745-7 attached to the cable end by means of a cable grip. Core hitches shall not be used. B. Cable reels shall be located and aligned so that the cable is paid out from the top of the reel by rotating the reel in the feed direction at the rate of pull into the duct or conduit in a long, smooth bend without twisting. Cable shall not be paid out from the bottom of the reel or by pulling. A cable feeder guide of proper dimensions shall be used at the mouth to guide the cable into the duct or conduit. . Rigging shall be set up at the pulling end so that the pulling line and cable exit on a line parallel with the duct or conduit to prevent either from rubbing against the edge or mouth. Cable ends shall not be pulled around sheave wheels. When the sheave or pulley cannot be positioned to obtain sufficient cable end slack for proper racking and splicing with the pulling line attached to the end of the cable, a split cable grip may be used to obtain the necessary slack. 2. All equipment and the pulling set shall be checked to minimize interruptions once pulling begins. Cable shall be paid out without stopping until the required amount of the cable has been placed. If the pulling operation is halted before the pull is completed, the tension of the pulling line shall not be released. When pulling is resumed, the inertia of the cable shall be overcome by increasing the tension in small steps a few seconds apart until the cable is in motion. 3. Pulling tension shall not exceed 450 lbs or cable manufacturer's recommendation, whichever is less. 3.06 HASB Installation A. If the CONTRACTOR uses the HASB method, it must cap the front end of the cable to prevent it from hanging up in the conduit. The CONTRACTOR shall use air seals that fit properly around the outside diameter of the cable being installed. The CONTRACTOR shall pressure test the entire conduit and couplings to ensure that the conduit can withstand the HASB installation method. B. The CONTRACTOR shall NOT use the HASB method from manhole to any control cabinet. The HASB method shall only be allowed from manhole to manhole, or from control cabinet to manhole. The conduit shall be clean and dry and the airtight integrity of the conduit shall be established. This shall be performed by blowing a hard mandrel through the conduit to establish that the conduit is not crushed. Then a tight fitting foam carrier shall be blown through the conduit at a high pressure. The 16745-8 foam carrier should travel through at approximately 100 feet per second in a clean conduit. If measurable water or dirt comes from the conduit the CONTRACTOR shall repeat the process. C. The recommended amount of lubricant shall be injected and spread by blowing a foam carrier through the conduit. D. Approximately 100 feet of cable shall be hand fed into the duct prior to closing and sealing the cable and air chamber on the blowing machine. The CONTRACTOR shall follow the machine manufacturer's instruction for all operations. E. All pneumatic and hydraulic hook-ups shall be checked for security prior to increasing the air pressure. 3.07 Damage and Defects A. Cable shall be carefully inspected for sheath defects or other irregularities as it is paid out from the reel. When defects are detected, pulling shall stop immediately and the cable section shall be repaired or replaced. A system of communications shall be maintained between pulling and feed locations so that pulling can be stopped instantly, when required. B. Cable ends pulled into manholes, vaults, pull boxes, or terminal locations that are not to be racked or otherwise permanently positioned immediately shall be tied in fixed positions to prevent damage to the cables and provide adequate working space. C. Adequate care shall be exercised when handling and storing reels of cable to prevent damage to the cable. Cable with dents, flat spots, or other sheath distortions shall not be installed. D. No nicks, cuts or splices will be permitted along the fiber optic cable length. All nicks and cuts in the fiber optic cable shall be brought to the attention of the PROJECT MANAGER and the PROFESSIONAL and shall be repaired or replaced as deemed appropriate by the PROFESSIONAL. 3.08 Fiber Optic Cable Installation Acceptance Tests: A. CONTRACTOR shall furnish test equipment, instrumentation, personnel and supplies to perform all testing. The PROFESSIONAL will witness and certify all fiber optic tests prior to installation and after installation. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the PROFESSIONAL and the PROJECT MANAGER with five (5) working days notice prior to each test. 16745-9 B. CONTRACTOR shall perform test measurements using equipment, procedures, and wavelengths in accordance with NECA/FOA 301-2009 and as recommended and approved by the cable supplier. Tests shall be performed for each existing and proposed optical fiber. Field tests shall include as a minimum: 1. Optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) test at 850 nanometers of the fiber optic cable on the reel prior to installation. Calibrate the OTDR to show anomalies of 0.2 dB minimum. The length of the fiber optic cable shall be recorded. Anomalies of 0.2 dB or more in the OTDR tests shall be recorded and brought to the PROFESSIONAL's and the PROJECT MANAGER's immediate attention. The contractor shall provide an appropriately sized OTDR launch box/pulse suppressor to compensate for Fresnel reflection and to eliminate 'dead zone' segments during fiber testing. All OTDR traces shall clearly indicate the losses of the installed connectors at both ends of the tested fiber. The OTDR and associated software shall be Tektronics TFP2, FiberMaster OTDR, EXFO FTB-400 or approved equal. Fiber trace electronic files shall conform to universal Bellcore format (.sor, Telcordia SR -4731). The contractor shall also have the option of providing the City of Clearwater with a licensed copy of software capable of reading the OTDR traces provided. 2. After the fiber optic cable has been installed and prior to termination, OTDR tests shall be repeated. The installed fiber optic cable lengths shall be recorded by the CONTRACTOR and supplied to the PROFESSIONAL. Tests shall be performed in a manner identical to the tests performed prior to installation. Variations in any of the OTDR tests of more than 20% from the values measured prior to installation will be cause for rejection of the installed fiber optic cable. If the fiber optic cable installation is rejected, the CONTRACTOR shall replace all defective or damaged fiber optic cable at CONTRACTOR's expense. Provide graphical hardcopy of traces and electronic data files on CD to the PROFESSIONAL. 3. Continuity testing to determine whether the fiber routing and/or polarization is correct and documentation is proper. Perform continuity testing of optical fibers by using an Optical Loss Test Set (OLTS) power meter and source. Trace the fiber from end-to- end through any interconnections to ensure the path is properly installed, and polarization and routing are correct and documented. 16745-10 4. End-to-end insertion loss by using an OLTS power meter and source. Test multimode cables by using TIA/EIA 526-14 Method B. Total loss shall be less than the calculated maximum loss for the cable based on appropriate standards. 5. After installation of the fiber optic cable and termination of the optical fiber at each end of the cable segment, the CON TRACTOR shall perform power attenuation tests at the light wavelength of the transmitter to be used by OWNER on the circuit being tested. Measure the flux at the fiber optic receiver end and compare to the flux injected at the transmitter end. Provide a jumper at each end of the circuit under test to validate end connector loss. Rotational optimization of the connectors will not be permitted. Circuit loss shall not exceed the calculated circuit loss by more than 2 dB. When any test is unsatisfactory, CONTRACTOR shall examine circuit to determine the problem. CONTRACTOR shall notify the PROFESSIONAL and the PROJECT MANAGER of the problem and proposed procedures to eliminate the problem. 6. The insertion loss for each mated fiber optic connector pair shall be 0.75 dB or less. Mated connector pair loss testing shall be based on applicable EIA/TIA standards. C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER with three (3) bound printed copies of all test results. The bound test results shall include : 1. Provide a graphical representation of each OTDR trace on 8.5" x 11" paper media which indicates the attenuation and distance of each optical fiber for each test performed. Note on each page of test output: a. Date and Time b. Test Location c. Test Technician's Name d. Test Equipment Used e. Cable number f. Strand number g. Strand Color h. Direction of Test i. Attenuation j. Length 2. Electronic data file of each trace on CD. 16745-11 3. Results of end-to-end insertion loss tests. Note on each page of test output: a. Date and Time b. Test Location c. Test Technician's Name d. Test Equipment Used e. Cable number f. Strand number g. Strand Color h. Direction of Test i. Attenuation j. Length 4. Test results shall include testing of the cable on the reel, test of each cable segment and tests of each termination. Test results shall also be incorporated into the O&M Manual supplied by the CONTRACTOR. 3.09 Fiber Optic Cable Splicing A. All fiber optic cable splices shall be fusion splice type. B. No factory or other splices are allowed except where pre -terminated CCH Panel pigtails are used for fiber terminations. C. Completed splices shall be covered with a protective sleeve, heat shrink type, to restore the protective properties of the fiber coating and buffering. Deviations to the splice, location and pulling plan, will only be permitted upon approval by the PROFESSIONAL. All fiber colors shall be continuous from end to end. No switching or staggering of color scheme within the cable at splice points shall be allowed. Fibers shall be spliced in order. D. Cables shall be brought out of the splice enclosure in an environmentally controlled environment to perform the fiber fusion splice operation. Splice shall be completed by returning the cable to the splice enclosure such that the excess cable does not impede future entrance and utilization. Cable shall be secured at regular intervals. E. Fusion splices resulting in a loss of greater than (>) 0.2 dB will be rejected and respliced at no expense to the owner. 3.10 Test Instrument Calibration 16745-12 A. The method(s) used to calibrate instrument(s) should be an approved method, method used should be documented in field test reports. All test equipment shall be in good mechanical and electrical condition. The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Instruments shall have been calibrated within the past 12 months, or by the minimum schedule allowed by the instrument manufacturer, whichever is less . Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment or calibration certification shall be included in the test results report. Records, which show date and results of instruments calibrated or tested, shall be kept up-to-date. Up-to-date instrument calibration instructions and procedures shall be maintained for each test instrument. The calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested. END OF SECTION 16745-13 SECTION 17000 CONTROL AND INFORMATION SYSTEM SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an approved professional SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR to have total systems responsibility for instrumentation, controls, services, and systems as indicated in the contract drawings and described herein. B. This section of the specifications shall be considered as a single unit and shall be included in the single source responsibility from the SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR. C. The SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR, working together with the CONTRACTOR, shall provide and install the total instrumentation requirements for System Controls and Instrumentation as described herein and shown in the contract drawings. D. This project provides for the addition of instruments, the addition of new Chemical Pump Control Panels and modifications to existing PLC Control Panels located at the City of Clearwater's Marshall Street WRF and Northeast WRF. E. The work shall also include modifying existing HMI screens and developing PO tags, historical database tags, alarm tags, etc. for the City of Clearwater's existing SCADA system. The SCADA system software employed by the City of Clearwater is CitectSCADA. F. The control systems will utilize standard industrial Allen Bradley CompactLogix Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), which shall be installed in the new Chemical Pump PLC Control Panel. G. The System Integrator shall provide the Chemical Pump PLC Control Panel, Tank Level Indicator Cabinet, wiring, installation, and communications. The System Integrator shall also be responsible for the PLC programming, HMI development, tag name dictionary, and control algorithms. H. Work includes engineering, furnishing, installing, testing, documenting and placing in operation the complete system. This work is specified in this Section and further detailed in the following section: 17000 - 1 I. Section 17430: Local Control Panel Devices and Enclosure Construction J. The scope of the work to be performed under this Division includes but is not limited to the following: 1. The Contractor shall, in partnership with the instrumentation subcontractor and the Owner, retain overall responsibility for the instrumentation and control system as specified herein. a. The Contractor/Systems Integrator shall be responsible to configure, test, and place in operation all the new components with related graphics and database development in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Furnish and install field mounted Storage Tank level transmitter cabinet as shown on the Loops, Location Plans and Installation Details. 3. Final termination and testing of all new instrumentation and control system wiring, including all new and existing terminations between field instruments, local control panels, and consoles. 4. Furnish and install analog and digital control system hardware and software as specified, and shown on the drawings. 5. Final termination and testing of all instrumentation and control system signal wiring and power supply wiring at all equipment furnished under this Division. 6. Coordinate grounding requirements with the electrical subcontractor for all analog and digital equipment, local control panels and instrumentation provided under this Division. Terminate grounding system cables at all equipment provided under this Division. 7. Provide system testing, calibration, training and startup services as specified herein and as required to make all systems fully operational. K. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to construct a complete and working installation. Items of equipment or materials which may reasonably be assumed as necessary to accomplish this end shall be supplied whether or not they are specifically stated herein. 1.2 RELATED ITEMS A. Field mounted Chemical Pump skid, eyewash stations, and other instrumentation and controls furnished with mechanical or electrical equipment not listed in the instrument schedule shall be furnished, installed, tested and calibrated as specified under other Divisions. B. Additional and related work performed under Division 16 includes the following: 17000 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. Instrument A.C. power source and disconnect switch for process instrumentation, A.C. grounding systems, and A.C. power supplies for all equipment, control panels and accessories furnished under Division 17. 2. Conduit and raceways for all instrumentation and control system signal wiring and grounding systems. 3. Instrumentation and control system signal wiring. 4. Furnish and install grounding systems for all digital equipment, local control panels, remote telemetry units, and instrumentation provided under Division 17. Grounding systems shall be complete to the equipment provided under Division 17, ready for termination by the instrumentation subcontractor. 5. Termination of all instrumentation and control system signal wiring at all equipment furnished under other divisions of the Specifications. 6. Final wiring and termination to A.C. grounding systems and to A.C. power sources 1.3 GENERAL INFORMATION AND DESCRIPTION A. Where manufacturers are named for a particular item of equipment, it is intended as a guide to acceptable quality and performance and does not exempt such equipment from the requirements of these Specifications or Drawings. B. In order to centralize responsibility, it is required that all equipment (including field instrumentation and control system hardware and software) offered under this Division shall be furnished and installed by the instrumentation subcontractor, or under the supervision of the instrumentation subcontractor, who shall assume complete responsibility for proper operation of the instrumentation and control system equipment, including that of coordinating all signals, and furnishing all appurtenant equipment. C. The Contractor shall retain total responsibility for the proper detailed design, fabrication, inspection, test, delivery, assembly, installation, activation, checkout, adjustment and operation of the entire instrumentation and control system as well as equipment and controls furnished under other Divisions of the Specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for the delivery of all detailed drawings, manuals and other documentation required for the complete coordination, installation, activation and operation of mechanical equipment, equipment control panels, local control panels, field instrumentation, control systems and related equipment and/or systems and shall provide for the services of a qualified installation Engineer to supervise all activities required to place the completed facility in stable operation under full digital control. 17000 - 3 D. The instrumentation and control system shall be capable of simultaneously implementing all real-time control and information system functions, and servicing all operator service requests as specified, without degrading the data handling and processing capability of any system component. It shall also be possible to simultaneously generate displays on all work stations and print out data on all printers without degradation of system performance. E. Control system inputs and outputs are listed in the Input/Output Schedules. This information, together with the control strategy descriptions, process and instrumentation diagrams, and electrical control schematics, describes the real-time monitoring and control functions to be performed. In addition, the system shall provide various man/machine interface and data reporting functions as specified in the software sections of this Specification. F. The mechanical, process, and electrical drawings indicate the approximate locations of field instruments, control panels, systems and equipment as well as field -mounted equipment provided by others. The instrumentation subcontractor shall examine the mechanical, process and electrical drawings to determine actual size and locations of process connections and wiring requirements for instrumentation and controls furnished under this Contract. The instrumentation subcontractor shall inspect all equipment, panels, instrumentation, controls and appurtenances either existing or furnished under other Divisions of the Specifications to determine all requirements to interface same with the control and information system. The Contractor shall coordinate the completion of any required modifications with the associated supplier of the item furnished. G. The instrumentation subcontractor shall review and approve the size and routing of all instrumentation and control cable and conduit systems furnished by the Electrical Subcontractor for suitability for use with the associated cable system. H. The Contractor shall coordinate the efforts of each supplier to aid in interfacing all systems. This effort shall include, but shall not be limited to, the distribution of approved shop drawings to the Electrical Subcontractor and to the instrumentation subcontractor furnishing the equipment under this Division. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a signal transmission system free from electrical interference which would be detrimental to the proper functioning of the instrumentation and control system equipment. J. The Owner shall have the right of access to the subcontractor's facility and the facilities of his equipment suppliers to inspect materials and parts; witness inspections, tests and work in progress; and examine applicable design documents, records and certifications during any stage of design, fabrication and tests. Office space, supplies and services required for these surveillance activities shall be furnished by the instrumentation subcontractor and his equipment suppliers. 17000 - 4 K. The terms "Instrumentation", "Instrumentation and Control System", and "Instrumentation, Control and Information System" shall hereinafter be defined as all equipment, labor, services and documents necessary to meet the intent of the Specifications. 1.4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM SUBCONTRACTORS A. Certification of System Integrator Qualifications: 1. Fourteen days after Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a certification from the selected Systems Integrator or vendor. The certification shall be typed on letterhead paper of the Systems Integrator or vendor firm. The certification shall be signed by an authorized representative of the Systems Integrator or vendor. The CONTRACTOR shall confirm the information, and submit to the PROJECT MANAGER. The PROJECT MANAGER shall evaluate the information and shall determine if the CONTRACTOR'S System Integrator meets the project requirements. Should the Systems Integrator fail to meet the requirements, the CONTRACTOR shall select another Systems Integrator and repeat the submittal process as described above." 2. The certification shall include the following: a. (Company name) hereby certifies intent to assume and execute full responsibility to the CONTRACTOR to perform all tasks defined under Specifications 17000, 17920 and 17950 Section 1.01 DESCRIPTION, in full compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents." b. Certifies that the System Integrator quotation to the CONTRACTOR includes full and complete compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents without exception. c. List of at least three instrumentation and control system projects successfully completed by the proposed System Integrator, of size and scope similar to that described herein, in which the applicant performed system engineering, system fabrication and installation, documentation (including schematic, wiring and panel assembly drawings), field testing, calibration and start-up, operator instruction and maintenance training. Each of the references cited must be accompanied by a written confirmation of the accuracy of the data by a managerial member of the control system operational staff. d. In addition, list the following information for each project above: a) Name of plant, Owner, contact name and telephone number. All phone numbers and contacts shall be verified by the applicant before submission. b) Name of manufacturer(s) for the majority of instrumentation provided. c) Type of equipment furnished (i.e., transmitters, recorders, indicators, etc.) 17000 - 5 d) Manufacturer and model number of DCS, SCADA, or PLC to which the system interfaced. e) Date of completion or acceptance. e. Furnish the name of the individual person who will be responsible for engineering and management of work noted above for this project, and the individual who will be responsible for field testing, calibration, start-up, and operator training for this project. Include references of recent projects of these individual persons. f. Submit specific documentation which verifies that the proposed Systems Integrator employs the minimum of individuals sufficient to and available for the above noted work who have been formally trained in the application of the: a) Indicated operating systems. b) Indicated software packages. c) Indicated graphical user interface software packages. Document that the applicant's company has been actively involved in the instrumentation systems business (under the same corporate name)." g. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Instrumentation equipment and enclosures shall be suitable for ambient conditions specified. All system elements shall operate properly in the presence of telephone lines, power lines, and electrical equipment. B. Field equipment including instrumentation, and panels may be subjected to wind, rain, lightning, and corrosives in the environment, with ambient temperatures from 0 to 50 degrees Celsius and relative humidity from 10 to 100 percent. All supports, brackets and interconnecting hardware shall be aluminum or 316 stainless steel as shown on the installation detail drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES A. All items of equipment listed in the instrument schedule, control panels, and all items of digital hardware shall be identified with nameplates. Each nameplate shall be located so that it is readable from the normal observation position and is clearly associated with the device or devices it identifies. Nameplates shall be positioned so that removal of the device for maintenance and repair shall not disturb the nameplate. Nameplates shall include the equipment identification number and description. Abbreviations of the description shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. 17000 - 6 B. Nameplates shall be made of 1/16 -inch thick machine engraved laminated phenolic plastic having white numbers and letters not less than 3/16 -inch high on a black background. C. Nameplates shall be attached to equipment by stainless steel screws or by an epoxy -based adhesive that is resistant to oil and moisture. In cases where the label cannot be attached by the above methods, it shall be drilled and attached to the associated device by means of stainless steel wire. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all soiled surfaces of installed equipment and materials. B. Upon completion of the instrumentation and control work, the Contractor shall remove all surplus materials, rubbish, and debris that has accumulated during the construction work. The entire area shall be left neat, clean, and acceptable to the Owner. END OF SECTION 17000 - 7 SECTION 17030 CONTROL AND INFORMATION SYSTEM SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall submit for review complete Shop Drawings for all equipment in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1 of the Specifications. All submittal material shall be complete, legible and reproducible, and shall apply specifically to this project. 1.2 DIGITAL HARDWARE SUBMITTALS A. Submit system block diagram(s) showing: 1. All equipment to be provided. 2. All interconnecting cable. 3. Equipment names, manufacturer, and model numbers. 4. Equipment locations. B. Submit information for all digital equipment including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Bill of materials with equipment names, manufacturers, complete model numbers and locations. 2. Catalog cuts. 3. Complete technical, material and environmental specifications. 4. Assembly drawings. 5. Mounting requirements. 6. Color samples. 7. Nameplates. 8. Environmental requirements during storage and operation. 1.3 SOFTWARE SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner and Engineer for approval, a proposed Graphic Screens for the operation and monitor of the proposed modifications, on the first 90 days from the starting date of the construction. 1. HMI screens modifications : The SYSTEM INTEGRATOR shall submit 11" x 17" color shop drawings depicting the proposed modifications to the associated Citect HMI screen(s) developed for the integration of the new Chemical Feed Systems to the City of Clearwater for review. No screen development or modification will be allowed prior to the documented approval of all HMI shop drawings by the City of Clearwater. 17030 - 1 2. Citectscada modifications : the system integrator shall provide written documentation as to the proposed additions, changes or modifications to any I/O tags, clusters, servers, reports, alarms, etc. to be developed and deployed in the CitectSCADA system. A complete and total listing of all additions or changes shall be submitted to the City of Clearwater for approval. No work shall be authorized without the documented approval of all CitectSCADA shop drawings by the City of Clearwater. B. Software submittals shall include the following as a minimum: 1. Bill of materials with software names, vendors, and complete listings of included software modules. 2. Standard manufacturer's literature describing the products. 3. Limitations or constraints of software. 4. Minimum system (processor and memory) requirements. 5. Operation and maintenance requirements. C. Submit information on the following software: 1. Third -party software, including: a. Operating system. b. Control software (block oriented and/or ladder logic). c. Office -type products, such as spreadsheets, word processors, etc. d. Database management software. e. Communications software, including all applicable local and wide area network software. f. Programmable logic controller programming software RSLogix 5000 or later (where applicable). g. All software shall conform to the version the City of Clearwater is using at the time of installation. 2. Software configuration, including: a. For each vendor package List of Tag names, Trend Names, Alarm Names, Server Names, Graphic names, Cicode Functions names, etc and all the forms used in CITECT Project Editor (All this Tags must be unique on the overall CITECT Data base). b. PLC data table organization and tagnames including cross reference to all input/output schedules. Data table registers shall be packed to minimize empty register and facilitate register polling in uniform blocks. c. HMI poll table driver configuration, HMI tagname to PLC control strategy internal register cross references to complete all linkages for interface of PLC data tables with operator workstations and database management system software development tasks. d. Intercommunications between hardware and software products required to implement system functions. D. Application Software 17030 - 2 1. Provide application software documentation which contains program descriptions for the operation, modification, and maintenance of all application programs provided for the digital system. 2. Application software includes all custom routines developed specifically for this project, or pre -written routines used for accomplishing specified functions for this project. This shall include VBASIC and C programs, and any other add-in custom software. These programs are not desired and should be restricted to limited use only, and only when absolutely necessary. 1.4 WIRING AND LOOP DIAGRAMS A. Submit interconnection wiring and loop diagrams for all panels and signals in the Control and Information System. B. Electrical interconnection diagrams shall show all terminations of equipment, including terminations to equipment and controls furnished under other Divisions, complete with equipment and cable designations. Where applicable, interconnection wiring diagrams shall be organized by input/output card. Interconnecting diagrams shall be prepared in a neat and legible manner on 11 inch by 17 inch reproducible prints. C. Loop drawings shall conform to the latest version of ISA Standards and Recommended Practices for Instrumentation and Control. Loop Drawings shall conform to ISA S5.4, Figure 4-6, Minimum Required Items plus Optional Items. 1.5 PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS A. Submit Process and Instrumentation Diagrams showing all instrumentation and control equipment, and all monitoring and control functions, for the entire Control and Information System as specified herein. B. Process and Instrumentation Diagrams shall conform to ISA S5.1 and S5.3, and all applicable ISA standards for symbology, nomenclature, and layout. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall deliver equipment operation and maintenance manuals in compliance with Section 01300 - Submittals. Operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals shall consist of two basic parts: 1. Manufacturer standard O&M manuals for all equipment and software furnished under this Division. 2. Custom O&M information describing the specific configuration of equipment and software, and the operation and maintenance requirements for this particular project. 17030 - 3 B. The manuals shall contain all illustrations, detailed drawings, wiring diagrams, and instructions necessary for installing, operating, and maintaining the equipment. The illustrated parts shall be numbered for identification. All modifications to manufacturer standard equipment and/or components shall be clearly identified and shown on the drawings and schematics. All information contained therein shall apply specifically to the equipment furnished and shall only include instructions that are applicable. All such illustrations shall be incorporated within the printing of the page to form a durable and permanent reference book. C. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, etc. that are required to instruct operation and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. The maintenance instructions shall include trouble shooting data and full preventive maintenance schedules. The instructions shall be bound in locking 3 -D -ring binders with bindings no larger than 3.5 inches and CD's with PDF files shall be provided. The manuals shall include 15% spare space for the addition of future material. The instructions shall include Drawings reduced or folded and shall provide at least the following as a minimum. 1. A comprehensive index. 2. A functional description of the entire system, with references to drawings and instructions. 3. A complete "As -built" set of all approved shop drawings, which shall reflect all work required to achieve final system acceptance. 4. A complete list of the equipment supplied, including serial numbers, ranges, and pertinent data. 5. Full specifications on each item. 6. Detailed service, maintenance and operation instructions for each item supplied. 7. Special maintenance requirements particular to this system shall be clearly defined, along with special calibration and test procedures. 8. Complete parts lists with stock numbers and name, address, and telephone number of the local supplier. 9. References to manufacturers' standard literature where applicable. 10. Warning notes shall be located throughout the manual where such notes are required to prevent accidents or inadvertent misuse of equipment. D. The operating instructions shall clearly describe the step-by-step procedures which must be followed to implement all phases of all operating modes. The instructions shall be in terms understandable and usable by operating personnel and maintenance crews and shall be useful in the training of such personnel. E. The maintenance instructions shall describe the detailed preventive and corrective procedures required, including environmental requirements during equipment storage and system operation, to keep the System in good operating condition. All hardware maintenance documentation shall make reference to appropriate diagnostics, where applicable, and all necessary wiring diagrams, component drawings and PCB schematic drawings shall be included. 17030 - 4 F. The hardware maintenance documentation shall include, as a minimum, the following information: 1. Operation Information - This information shall include a detailed description of how the equipment operates and a block diagram illustrating each major assembly in the equipment. 2. Preventive-Maintenance Instructions - These instructions shall include all applicable visual examinations, hardware testing and diagnostic routines, and the adjustments necessary for periodic preventive maintenance of the System. 3. Corrective-Maintenance Instructions - These instructions shall include guides for locating malfunctions down to the card-replacement level. These guides shall include adequate details for quickly and efficiently locating the cause of an equipment malfunction and shall state the probable source(s) of trouble, the symptoms, probable cause, and instructions for remedying the malfunction. 4. Parts Information - This information shall include the identification of each replaceable or field-repairable component. All parts shall be identified on a list in a drawing; the identification shall be of a level of detail sufficient for procuring any repairable or replaceable part. Cross-references between equipment numbers and manufacturer's part numbers shall be provided. G. Software documentation shall conform to a standard format and shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. A program abstract which includes: a. Program Name - The symbolic alphanumeric program name. b. Program Title - English text identification. c. Program Synopsis - A brief text shall be provided that specifies the need for the program, states when it shall be used and functionally describes all inputs, outputs and functions performed. This descriptive text shall be written in a language that is understandable by nonsoftware oriented readers. 2. Program Description: The program description shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Applicable Documents - List all documents (standard manufacturer's literature, other program descriptions, etc.) by section, if practical, that apply to the program. One complete copy of all applicable reference material shall be provided. b. Input-Output - Identify each input and output parameter, variable and software element used by the program. State the purpose of all inputs, outputs and variables. 17030 - 5 c. Processing - This section shall contain a description of the overall structure and function of the program. Describe the program run stream and present a detailed description of how the program operates. Describe the timing and sequencing of operations of the program relative to other programs. Describe all interactions with other programs. Processing logic which is not readily described without considerable background information shall be handled as a special topic with references to an appendix or to control strategy document which details the necessary information. Reference shall also be made to an appendix or control strategy document for equation and program algorithm derivations. d. System Configuration - Describe in detail the system configuration or status required for program implementation, if appropriate. e. Limitation and Constraints - Summarize all known or anticipated limitations of the program, if appropriate. f. Storage - Define program storage requirements in terms of disk or RAM memory allocation. g. Verification - Describe, as a minimum, a test that can be used by the operator to assure proper program operation. Define the required system configuration, input requirements and criteria for successful test completion. h. Diagnostics - Describe all program diagnostics, where applicable. Descriptions shall list each error statement, indicate clearly what it means, and specify what appropriate actions should be taken. i. Malfunction Procedures - Specify procedures to follow for recovering from a malfunction due to either operator error or other sources. 1.7 FINAL SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION A. All documentation shall be delivered to the Owner prior to final system acceptance in accordance with the Contract Documents. As a minimum, final documentation shall contain all information originally part of the control system submittals. B. If any documentation or other technical information submitted is considered proprietary, such information shall be designated. Documentation or technical information which is designated as being proprietary will be used only for the construction, operation, or maintenance of the System and, to the extent permitted by law, will not be published or otherwise disclosed. C. Provide a complete set of detailed electrical interconnection diagrams required to define the complete instrumentation and control system. All diagrams shall be 11 inches by 17 inches original reproducible prints. All diagrams shall be corrected so as to describe final "as -built" hardware configurations and to reflect the system configuration and control methodology adopted to achieve final system acceptance. D. Provide system software documentation for the operation and maintenance of all system software programs provided as a part of the digital system. All system software documentation shall be amended as required to delineate all modifications and to accurately reflect the final as -built software configurations. 17030 - 6 E. Provide application software documentation which contains program descriptions for the operation, modification, and maintenance of all application programs provided for the digital system. F. Provide control strategy documentation which shall include control strategy (block oriented or ladder logic) diagrams to describe the control of all processes. Control strategy documentation shall reflect the system configuration and control methodology adopted to achieve final system acceptance. Control strategy documentation shall conform to the submittal requirements listed hereinabove. G. The Owner recognizes the fact that not all possible problems related to real-time events, software interlocks, flags, active tasks, and hardware maintenance and utilization can be discovered during the Acceptance Tests. Therefore, the instrumentation subcontractor through the Contractor shall investigate, diagnose, repair, update, and distribute all pertaining documentation of the deficiencies which become evident during the warranty period. All such documentation shall be submitted in writing to the Owner within 30 days of identifying and solving the problem. 1.8 PROGRAMS AND SOURCE LISTINGS A. Provide two copies of all standard, of -the -shelf system and application software (exclusive of firmware resident software) on disk. One copy shall be the original CD- ROMs or disks from the manufacturer, with one additional copy for backup purposes. B. Provide two copies of source listings on disk or CD-ROM for all custom software written specifically for this facility, including but not limited to all database files configured for this facility, PLC operator interface configurations and graphics and all control strategies (PLC programs). All source listings shall include a program abstract, program linkage and input/output data. Comments describing the program flow shall be frequently interspersed throughout each listing. 1.9 SUBMITTAL/DOCUMENTATION FORMAT A. All drawing -type submittals and documentation shall be rendered and submitted in digital form on CD-ROM in the latest version of AutoCAD. B. All graphical and textual -type submittals and documentation including operation and maintenance manuals shall be rendered and submitted in digital form on CD-ROM in the latest version of Microsoft Word or Adobe Acrobat Reader format or equivalent browser based format. Graphical images shall be JPEG or equivalent browser based formats. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 17030 - 7 SECTION 17040 CONTROL AND INFORMATION SYSTEM TRAINING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. To familiarize the Owner's personnel with the process control system and field instrumentation, training shall be provided in accordance with the sequence of construction and project schedule for the startup of plant processes and systems and as detailed hereunder. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 17000 - Control and Information System Scope and General Requirements 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. A minimum of 60 days prior to beginning training and in accordance with the construction sequence and schedule, submit a detailed training plan describing the following: 1. A listing of all courses to be conducted. 2. Course content. 3. Applicability of each course to management, operations, maintenance, laboratory, etc., personnel. 4. Course schedules. 5. Qualifications and experience of individual(s) providing training. B. A minimum of 14 days prior to beginning each training course, submit documentation for use by the Owner's personnel during training. The training documentation shall be specific to the particular course, and shall include the following: 1. A listing of all subjects to be covered. 2. Course schedule. 3. Documentation/lesson plans covering all subjects to be covered during the course instruction. Information shall be in a "how to" format, with sufficient background documentation and references to manufacturer literature to provide a thorough and clear understanding of the materials to be covered. 1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All costs of providing the training courses shall be borne by the Contractor. B. As used herein, the term "day" shall mean an eight-hour day, and the term "week" shall mean a five-day, 40 -hour week. C. All training courses shall be conducted under the direction of a training director who shall design a detailed training plan that complements the experience and skill levels of the Owner's personnel. 17040 - 1 D. Training courses shall be structured in order of increasing capability or security levels. The purpose of this requirement is to allow personnel with lesser training requirements or security password levels to drop out of the training at certain times while the training continues for personnel with greater requirements or higher security levels. E. All training courses shall include lecture as well as "hands on" experience for each of the attending personnel. The Contractor shall provide sufficient equipment for this to be accomplished. For example, training in which the instructor uses the computer and the Owner's personnel passively observe as the instructor demonstrates system functions shall not be acceptable. F. Unless otherwise specified, all training courses shall be conducted in the Owner's facilities. G. All training shall be completed prior to system acceptance. H. Standard manufacturer training courses are acceptable pending approval by the Engineer and Owner. L All training courses shall be videotaped by the CONTRACTOR. 1.5 SYSTEM SUPERVISOR/ENGINEER TRAINING A. Provide manufacturer standard training in the use and configuration of the specified operator work station software (Current plant version). An instructor certified by the software manufacturer to furnish such training shall perform this training. B. System supervisor/engineer training shall be performed a minimum of 30 days prior to initial system startup associated with the construction sequence and schedule. Total training duration shall be a minimum of five days. All Training to be performed on- site. C. Training shall be provided in the following subjects: 1. System overview and capabilities. 2. Database configuration. 3. Graphic display configuration, including linking of data to displays. 4. Historical data configuration (collection, manipulation, and display). 5. Real-time and historical trending. 6. Report configuration, generation, printing, and customization. 7. Alarm configuration and management. 8. System security. 9. UO driver use and configuration. 10. System backup and recovery. 11. DDE linking, where applicable. 12. System command language. 13. Troubleshooting. 14. System optimization. 15. System startup and shutdown procedures. 16. LAN and WAN communications, as appropriate. 17040 - 2 D. The courses shall be structured as follows: 1. Fundamentals - One (1) one -day course (minimum) shall be provided for up to four persons which shall serve as a digital control system familiarization course for project management personnel, engineers, and key operating/maintenance personnel. This course shall be a prerequisite for the advanced course described below in Item 2. 2. Advanced - One (1) one -day (minimum) digital system configuration and operating course shall be provided for up to four persons. The level of training shall be sufficient to familiarize the Owner's personnel with the configuration and application of all system programs. All essential system operating procedures shall be described as required to enable the Owner's personnel to operate the system via the various work stations and local control panels. 1.6 OPERATOR TRAINING A. Operator training shall include familiarization training covering the Control and Information System. Operators shall be instructed in the names, locations, functions, and basic operation of all items of digital equipment and associated software. B. Operator training shall cover process and equipment operation both individually and collectively as an operating system. Normal as well as abnormal operating conditions shall be covered, including the response to failure occurrences and system alarms. All operator/system interactions shall be described. C. Operators shall be trained to instruct other operators and shall be provided with all course materials. 1.7 MAINTENANCE TRAINING A. A one -day course shall be conducted for up to four persons prior to the start-up of digital equipment at the Owner's plant. Instruction shall be provided in the following: 1. Operating all digital equipment, including system start-up and shutdown procedures. 2. The use of hardware diagnostic routines, test equipment and test procedures as required to enable the Owner's personnel to detect and isolate system faults to the circuit board or module level and to implement repairs by replacing failed circuit boards or modules. 3. Calibration and routine maintenance procedures for all analog and digital equipment. B. Step by step written procedures shall be provided for all preventive maintenance tasks and for identifying hardware faults to the circuit board or module level for all items of digital equipment. C. All digital equipment preventive and corrective maintenance training activities shall be limited to the use of commercially available off-the-shelf test equipment and to the use of diagnostic routines and hardware items which are the same as those to be provided as part of the system. 17040 - 3 1.8 INSTRUMENT TRAINING A. A one -day course shall be provided at the Owner's facilities no more than three months prior to system start-up to instruct a minimum of two persons each in the calibration and preventive maintenance of the field instruments provided under this Contract. 1.9 PROPOSED TRAINING AGREEMENT A. The instrumentation subcontractor shall submit a proposed training agreement to extend the training services described above for a period of up to five years from the expiration of the guarantee period. The proposed agreement shall include provisions for payment on a cost plus expenses basis and renegotiation of contract prices based upon changes in recognized economic indicators published by the United States Department of Commerce. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 17040 - 4 SECTION 17070 CONTROL AND INFORMATION SYSTEM TESTING - GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall test the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 17000 - Control and Information System Scope and General Requirements B. Section 17073 - Field Testing C. Section 17074 - Final Acceptance Test 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. For each of the specified tests, submit a test plan to the Engineer at least one month in advance of commencement of the tests. The test plan shall contain the following at a minimum: 1. A schedule of all testing to be conducted. 2. A brief description of the testing to be performed. 3. Test objectives. 4. Testing criteria per the Specifications. 5. Check lists and procedures for performing each of the specified tests. 6. Sample test result documentation. 7. Requirements for other parties. 1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All system start-up and test activities shall follow detailed test procedures, check lists, etc., previously approved by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be notified at least 21 days in advance of any system tests and reserves the right to have his and/or the Owner's representatives in attendance. B. The Contractor shall provide the services of experienced factory trained technicians, tools and equipment to field calibrate, test, inspect, and adjust all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions. C. The Contractor (or designee) shall maintain master log books for each phase of installation, startup and testing activities specified herein. Each log book shall include signal, loop or control strategy tag number, equipment identification, description and space for sign -off dates, Contractor signature and Engineer signature. Example test documentation specific to each phase of testing shall be approved prior to initiation of that testing, as specified hereinabove. 17070 - 1 D. All test data shall be recorded on test forms, previously approved by the Engineer. When each test has been successfully completed, a certified copy of all test results shall be furnished to the Engineer together with a clear and unequivocal statement that all specified test requirements have been met and that the system is operating in accordance with the Contract Documents. E. The Engineer will review test documentation in accordance with the Contract Documents and will give written notice of the acceptability of the tests within 10 days of receipt of the test results. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 17070 - 2 SECTION 17073 FIELD TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform field testing on the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 17000 - Control and Information System B. Section 17070 - Control and Information System Testing, General C. Section 17074 - Final Acceptance Test 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All system start-up and test activities shall follow detailed test procedures; check lists, etc., previously approved by the Engineer. B. Control system start-up and testing shall be performed to ensure that all plant processes shall be systematically and safely placed under digital control in the following order: 1. New Primary elements such as transmitters and switch devices shall be calibrated and tested. 2. Each control loop shall be tested as specified hereinafter. 3. Each new control strategy shall be tested under automatic control both from the local control level and through the operator work station as specified hereinafter. 4. The entire new plant control systems shall be tested for overall monitoring, control, communications, and information management functions, and demonstrated for system availability as specified hereinafter. Existing unmodified control system features shall be tested sufficiently to verify they remain operational as originally programmed. C. System start-up and test activities shall include the use of clean water as necessary, to establish service conditions that simulate, to the greatest extent possible, normal operating conditions in terms of applied process loads, operating ranges and environmental conditions prior to testing with actual wastewater flows. D. Each phase of testing shall be fully and successfully completed and all associated documentation submitted and approved prior to the next phase being started. Specific exceptions are allowed if written approval has been obtained in advance from the Engineer. E. System testing of control strategies shall be staged and follow a logical timeline pertaining to the associated system start-up sequence. 17073 - 1 F. The Contractor shall ensure that all mechanical equipment, equipment control panels, local control panels, field instrumentation, control system equipment and related equipment and/or systems are tested for proper installation, adjusted and calibrated on a loop -by -loop basis prior to control system startup to verify that each is ready to function as specified. Each test shall be witnessed, dated and signed off by both the Contractor (or designee) and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. G. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of meetings with all affected trades. A meeting shall be held each morning to review the day's test schedule with all affected trades. Similarly, a meeting shall be held each evening to review the day's test results and to review or revise the next day's test schedule as appropriate. H. The Contractor shall ensure that the electrical subcontractor conforms with the start-up, test and sign -off procedures specified herein to assure proper function and coordination of all motor control center control and interlock circuitry and the transmission of all discrete and/or analog signals between equipment furnished by the electrical subcontractor and the control system specified herein. 1.4 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT TESTING A. The proper control of all final control elements shall be verified by tests conducted in accordance with the requirements specified herein. B. All modulating final control elements shall be tested for appropriate speed or position response by applying power and input demand signals, and observing the equipment for proper direction and level of reaction. Each final control element shall be tested at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of signal input level and the results checked against specified accuracy tolerances. Final control elements which require turndown limits such as VFD's shall be initially set during this test. C. All non -modulating final control elements shall be tested for appropriate position response by applying and simulating control signals, and observing the equipment for proper reaction. 1.5 LOOP CHECKOUT A. Prior to control system startup and testing, each monitoring and control loop shall be tested on an individual basis from the primary element to the final element, including the operator work station or loop controller level, for continuity and for proper operation and calibration. B. Signals from transducers, sensors, and transmitters shall be utilized to verify control responses. Simulated input data signals may be used subject to prior written approval by the Engineer. All modes of control shall be exercised and checked for proper operation. C. The accuracy of all ADC's shall be verified by manually entering engineering unit data values at the operator's console and then reading and recording the resulting analog output data. 17073 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D. The accuracy of all ADC's shall be verified using field inputs or by manually applying input signals at the final controller, and then reading and recording the resulting analog input data at the operator work station. E. Each loop tested shall be witnessed, dated and signed off by both the Contractor (or designee) and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. 1.6 CONTROL SYSTEM STARTUP AND TESTING A. Control system startup and testing shall be performed to demonstrate complete compliance with all specified functional and operational requirements. Testing activities shall include the simulation of both normal and abnormal operating conditions. (The following testing activities expand on the summary testing order illustrated in sub -sections one (1) through four (4) of Section 1.03 General Requirements Section B in this Specification). B. All digital hardware shall be fully inspected and tested for function, operation and continuity of circuits. All diagnostic programs shall be run to verify the proper operation of all digital equipment. C. Final control elements and ancillary equipment shall be tested under start-up and steady-state operating conditions to verify that proper and stable control is achieved using local area control panels, motor control center circuits, and local field mounted control circuits. All hardwired control circuit interlocks and alarms shall be operational. The control to final control elements and ancillary equipment shall be tested using both manual and automatic (where provided) control circuits. D. Signals from transducers, sensors, and transmitters shall be utilized to verify control responses for final control elements. Simulated input data signals shall be used to test the Full Range of the associated Loop. E. Each control strategy shall be tested to verify the proper operation of all required functions. The control system start-up and test activities shall include procedures for tuning all control loops incorporating PID control modules, and for adjusting and testing all control loops as required to verify specified performance. F. The control system start-up and test activities shall include running tests to prove that the Instrumentation, Control and Information System is capable of continuously, safely and reliably regulating processes, as required by the Contract, under service conditions that simulate, to the greatest extent possible, normal plant operating ranges and environmental conditions. G. The Owner and/or Engineer shall witness the functional acceptance test performed to demonstrate satisfactory performance of individual monitoring of control loops and control strategies. The test shall be performed to verify that the control and instrumentation system is capable of simultaneously implementing all specified operations. H. Each loop and control strategy test shall be witnessed and signed off by both the Contractor (or designee) and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. 17073 - 3 1.7 STARTUP COORDINATION A. Start-up shall comply with requirements specified in the Contract Documents and those requirements specified herein. Start-up shall commence after all previously described start-up and test activities have been successfully completed and shall demonstrate that the Instrumentation, Control and Information System can meet all contract requirements with plant equipment operating over full operating ranges under actual operating conditions. B. The control system start-up period shall be coordinated with process startup activities and shall be extended as required until all plant processes are fully operational and to satisfy the Engineer that all control system contract requirements have been fulfilled in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. The instrumentation subcontractor's personnel shall be resident at the treatment facility to provide both full time (eight hours/day, five days/week) and 24 hours on-call (seven days/week) support of operating and maintenance activities for the duration of the plant start-up period. D. At least one qualified control systems technician shall be provided for control system startup and test activities (at least two when loop checkout is being performed). 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Specification 17030. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 17073 - 4 SECTION 17074 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform the Final Acceptance Test on the Control and Information System as specified herein to demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 17000 - Control and Information System Scope and General Requirements B. Section 17070 - Control and Information System Testing, General C. Section 17073 - Field Testing 1.3 AVAILABILITY DEMONSTRATION AND FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. Upon completion of all plant control system startup activities as illustrated in Section 17073 and prior to final system acceptance, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the availability of the entire control system, including operation under conditions of digital equipment fail -over, initiated either automatically or manually, shall be not less than 99.8 percent during a 30 day availability test period. The Owner shall be given two (2) weeks notice of the starting date of the 30 day availability test. B. Upon completion of the 30 day availability test the Owner will be asked to sign off on the system as -is. If the Owner is satisfied that the system is functionally correct at that time, then the 30 day availability test will be the Final Acceptance Test. If the Owner is not satisfied at the end on the 30 day availability period the Contractor will correct any outstanding issues and re -test the systems in question to the Owner's satisfaction. A Final Acceptance Test of these systems will then be performed for the Owner's final approval. C. For purposes of determining availability figures, downtime of each new system or portions of each new system resulting from the causes specified hereunder will not be considered system failures. 1. Downtime of a new PLC Component that is not automatically backed -up shall be considered a system failure if the downtime of the failed controller exceeds one (1) hour. 2. Downtime of a portion of the system resulting from failure of any new field sensor shall not be considered a system failure provided that the system operates as specified under this condition. 3. Total shutdown of a single new PLC system resulting from a control strategy fault shall be considered a system failure. 17074 - 1 4. An erroneous command to the process that can be specifically related to a new PLC fault shall be considered as one (1) hour of downtime. D. If the system fails the 30 day availability test, the 30 day test period shall be restarted after the failed component or software is repaired/replaced and full operation is restored. E. The Contractor shall submit an availability demonstration report which shall state that all system availability requirements have been met. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Specification 17070, Section 1.03. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 17074-2 SECTION 17080 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. It is the intent of these Specifications and Drawings to secure high quality in all materials, equipment and workmanship in order to facilitate operations and maintenance of the Plant. The Contractor shall provide equipment and services to meet this intent. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be installed in accordance with the National Electric Code, National Electric Safety Code, OSHA, state, local and other applicable codes. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE - GENERAL A. All equipment and materials shall be new and the products of reputable recognized suppliers having adequate experience in the manufacture of these particular items. B. For uniformity, only one manufacturer will be accepted for each type of product. C. All equipment shall be designed for the service intended and shall be of rugged construction, of ample strength for all stresses which may occur during fabrication, transportation, erection and during continuous or intermittent operation. They shall be adequately stayed, braced and anchored and shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Appearance and safety, as well as utility, shall be given consideration in the design of details. D. All components and devices installed shall be standard items of industrial grade, unless otherwise noted, which shall be of sturdy and durable construction and be suitable for long, trouble-free service. E. Electronic equipment shall be all solid state construction, utilizing microprocessors, unless otherwise specified. Components shall be derated to assure dependability and long-term stability. F. Printed circuit boards in field mounted equipment shall be suitable for the specified environmental conditions. G. Alignment and adjustments shall be non-critical, stable with temperature changes or aging and accomplished with premium grade potentiometers. H. Components of specially selected values shall not be inserted into standard electronic assemblies in order to meet the performance requirements of this specification. 17080 - 1 1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT A. Optional or substituted equipment or both requiring changes in details or dimensions required to maintain all structural, mechanical, electrical, control, operating, maintenance or design features incorporated in these Specifications and Drawings shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. In the event that the changes are necessary, calculations and drawings showing the proposed revisions shall be submitted for approval. The Contractor shall coordinate all changes with other affected trades and contracts and pay all additional charges incurred. 1.5 GUARANTEE A. The instrumentation subcontractor through the Contractor shall install, maintain and guarantee the Instrumentation, Control and Information System as specified under the General Conditions and Division 1 of the Specifications. Maintenance personnel provided by the instrumentation subcontractor shall instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation, adjustment, calibration and repair of the equipment being serviced. All preventive and corrective activities shall be documented with service reports which shall identify the equipment being serviced, state the condition of the equipment, describe all work performed and list materials used. A copy of all service reports shall be delivered to the Owner on the day the work is performed. B. The instrumentation subcontractor shall provide the services of factory -trained service technician(s) at least twice during the guarantee period of 2 years, for the purpose of performing preventive hardware maintenance. C. Corrective hardware and software maintenance during the guarantee period shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Division 1 and, in addition, shall meet the following requirements: 1. Corrective hardware maintenance shall be performed by factory -trained service technician(s) specifically trained to service the digital equipment provided. Technicians possessing suitable training and experience shall be provided to perform corrective maintenance on all other equipment. The hardware service technician(s) shall be available on-site within 24 working hours after notification by the Owner. 2. Corrective software maintenance shall be performed for software provided by the instrumentation subcontractor and incorporated into the system prior to the completion of system commissioning. Software service programmer(s) shall be available for consultation within four business hours and, if required, on-site within 16 business hours after notification by the Owner. Corrective software maintenance shall include the supply, installation and startup of all application software upgrades released during the guarantee period. 3. Corrective hardware and software maintenance performed during the guarantee period shall be performed at no cost to the Owner. 17080 - 2 4. As used herein, the term "working hours" shall be defined as those of the treatment facility (seven days per week, 24 hours per day). The term "business hours" shall be defined as the hours between 8 a.m. and 5 p.m., local time, Monday through Friday; excluding holidays. 5. The guarantee period shall commence upon final acceptance of the completed treatment facility in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. D. The instrumentation subcontractor shall submit to the Owner a proposed maintenance agreement incorporating the following features: 1. Extension of preventive hardware maintenance services as described above for a period of up to five years from the expiration of the guarantee period. 2. Provisions for corrective hardware and/or software maintenance work on a will -call basis for a period of up to five years from the expiration of the guarantee period. Corrective maintenance work shall be performed by properly trained personnel as described above. E. The proposed agreement shall include provisions for payment based upon an annual fee for preventive maintenance and cost plus expenses for corrective maintenance work. The portion dealing with corrective maintenance shall be written to include corrective maintenance caused by actions of the Owner during the warranty period and shall contain clauses for renegotiation of contract prices based upon changes in recognized economic indicators published by the United States Department of Commerce. 1.6 SHIPPING HANDLING AND STORAGE A. In addition to shipping, handling and storage requirements specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, air conditioning/heating shall be provided for storage of all field instrumentation, panels, digital equipment and ancillary devices to maintain temperatures between 20 and 25 degrees C and relative humidity 40 to 60 percent without condensation. The air shall be filtered and free of corrosive contaminants and moisture. 1.7 FABRICATION A. Fabrication of all equipment shall conform to the codes and standards outlined in this Section, and other portions of the Contract Documents. B. The Engineer may inspect the fabricated equipment at the factory before shipment to job site. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with sufficient prior notice so that an inspection can be arranged at the factory. Inspection of the equipment at the factory by the Engineer will be made after the manufacturer has performed satisfactory checks, adjustments, tests and operations. C. Equipment approval at the factory only allows the equipment to shipped to the project site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper storage, installation and satisfactory start-up and operation of the equipment to the satisfaction of the manufacturer and the Engineer. 17080 - 3 1.8 INSTALLATION A. All instrumentation and control system installation work shall conform to the codes and standards outlined in this Section, and other portions of the Contract Documents. B. The instrumentation subcontractor shall assign a competent representative who shall provide full time coordination and supervision of all on-site instrumentation and control system construction work from commencement of plant construction through completion and final acceptance. C. All labor shall be performed by qualified craftsmen in accordance with the standards of workmanship in their profession and shall have had a minimum of five years of documented experience on similar projects. D. All equipment and materials shall fit properly in their installations. Any required work to correct improperly fit installations shall be performed at no additional expense to the Owner. E. Sufficient common -mode and differential -mode noise rejection shall be provided to insure operation of the plant process control system to meet all specification requirements. General practice shall include: 1. Maintaining crossings between noisy wires and signal wires at right angles. 2. Maintaining separation between noisy wires and signal wires as wide as practical. 3. Grounding all signals, shields and power supplies at the process control unit or local control panel. 4. Providing passive filters on signals with time constant compatible with scan intervals and over -voltage protection. 5. Minimizing the number of cable splices. 6. Providing a floating output for transmitters that have their own power sources. F. The case of each field instrument and control panel shall be grounded in compliance with the National Electric Code. G. Power wires shall be separated from parallel -running signal wires by the following minimum spacing: CIRCUIT VOLTAGE (VAC) MINIMUM SPACING (IN.) 120 12 240 18 480 18 2000 and above 24 H. The Contractor shall provide all required cutting, drilling, inserts, supports, bolts, and anchors, and shall securely attach all equipment and materials to their supports. Embedded supports for equipment furnished under this Division shall be provided and installed as shown specified herein and shown on the drawings. 17080 - 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 17080 - 5 SECTION 17120 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER COMPONENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. RTD-Subp1. Provide and install new I/O Modules in the new Chemical Feed Control Panels to be provided under this contract. (per Addendum 2) 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 17000 - Control and Information System Scope and General Requirements PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIRED UO MODULES A. Compactlogix 8 -channel analog input module, Allen Bradley 1769-1F8, no equals. B. Compactlogix 4 -channel analog output module, Allen Bradley 1769-0F4, no equals. C. Compactlogix 16 -point, 24VDC discrete input module, Allen Bradley 1769-IQ16, no equals. D. Compactlogix 8 -point, VAC/VDC relay module, Allen Bradley 1769-0W8, no equals. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 17000. END OF SECTION 17120 - 1 SECTION 17430 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL DEVICES AND ENCLOSURE CONSTRUCTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes technical requirements for fabrication, engineering and wiring of instrument panels and enclosures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the applicable provision of the following codes and standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 2. Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) 3. National Electrical Code (NEC) 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 5. Instrumentation Society of America (ISA) B. All electrical materials and equipment shall be new and shall bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratory (UL), Inc., Factory Mutual (FM) or equivalent where standards have been established and label service regularly applies. All control panels to be UL508 certified. C. All control panels, when required by Code(s), shall comply with the requirements of UL -508A, and NEC 409. D. Provide integrated control systems. Assign complete responsibility for furnishing, coordination, assembly, and installation supervision of all equipment to one Systems Integrator regularly engaged in the manufacture, assembly and production of systems of type specified. Provide complete, satisfactory, and trouble-free operating installation. E. Furnish like instruments from the same manufacturer. Minimize number of different manufacturers. 17430-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Panels and enclosures shall meet the NEMA requirements for the type specified. B. Sizes shown are estimates. Furnish panels and enclosures amply sized to house all equipment, instruments, front panel mounted devices, power supplies, power distribution panels, wiring, tubing and other components installed within. C. Panels shall be NEMA 4X, aluminum powder coated white with piano hinge and 3 -point latching system as manufactured by Hoffman. Refer to drawings for other specifications. D. Panels are to be sized by the integrator based on the equipment furnished, but must adhere to the space available. E. Intended panel sizes are shown on the drawings. Panels may be increased in size only upon prior approval by the Engineer. F. Provide panel fabrication such that all internal installed devices are located on a back plate of the panel. Devices mounted on the sides of the panel will not be allowed. H. Panel Mounted Equipment 1. Unless otherwise specified, provide components to operate on 120 Volts AC single phase 60 -Hertz power. 2. Provide 24V DC power supplies as indicated and required. 3. Provide interposing relays and signal isolators to protect panel mounted equipment from electrical surges induced in field wiring. 4. Provide nameplates to identify each panel mounted component. Panel Accessories 1. Provide corrosion inhibitors and breather drains for condensation and corrosion control inside panel. 2. One 24V DC, LED light fixture (Hoffman LED24V15) with protective plastic shield. Provide and install remote door switch and associated door switch cable for cabinet light. Hoffman ALFSWD. 17430-2 2.02 PANEL CONSTRUCTION A. NEMA 4X Panel 1. Fabricate NEMA 4X enclosure from 14 gauge (minimum) 304 stainless steel. 2. Provide non -corrodible metal hardware including hinge and cover clamps. 3. Stainless steel enclosure to be powder coated white. 4. Provide conduit knock -outs prior to installation of equipment inside enclosure. Provide water tight myers hubs. (Double locknuts are not acceptable.) 5. Provide deadfront door in interior of panel for OIT device mounting (PLC Control Panel only). 6. Rolled lip around three sides of door and along top of enclosure opening. 7. Hasp and staple for padlocking. 8. Provide 3 -point latching system. 2.03 PANEL GROUNDING A. Provide ground busbars, which shall be directly wired and connected to facility grounding system. B. Provide isolated ground bus (for analog cable shield termination) to be isolated from all other equipment grounds. 2.04 PANEL WIRING A. Terminate all wiring, to and from field devices, at panel terminal blocks, not on equipment terminals. B. Do not terminate more than two wires at the same terminal. Wiring splices and wire nuts will not be permitted within the enclosure. C. Provide wire identification at each wire end. Utilize computer-generated, heatshrink type wire markers. D. Install all wiring in plastic wiring ducts, provided with snap -on covers. Size ducts 17430-3 to include at least 100% spare capacity. Restrain all wiring outside of ducts with plastic ties. E. Group and wrap all wires passing a door hinge in protective wire harness. Provide abrasion protection for wire bundles passing through holes or across sheet metal edges. F. All power wire insulation shall be rated 600 volt THHN/THWN (for field wiring) and MTW (for control panel wiring). Conductors shall be tinned copper. No wire smaller than number 14 AWG shall be used for power wiring. 1. Power wiring: No. 12 AWG copper minimum 2. Control wiring: No. 14 AWG copper minimum 3. Electronic signal wiring: 2/C #16 twisted shielded pair minimum. Belden 8719. 4. Ethernet network wiring: Category 6, shielded minimum. G. Physically separate AC wiring from DC wiring. 1. Where AC and DC wiring runs in parallel, provide at least 2 -inch separation. 2. Where AC and DC wiring cross, they shall cross at 90°. H. Do not daisy -chain neutral wiring and grounding conductors at equipment terminals. Provide terminal blocks that accept jumper bridges. 2.05 PANEL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. DIN Rails: Provide all DIN rails of aluminum construction. B. Provide terminal blocks for field wiring and equipment wiring terminations. Provide unique identification at each terminal block. 1. Arrange terminal blocks in consecutively, based on standard alphanumeric order. 2. Group terminal blocks based on voltage level and function. 3. Color code foreign voltage terminal block identification to match wire insulation. 17430-4 C. Provide at least 25% spare terminal blocks for each type used in each enclosure. D. Provide high-density modular type terminal blocks suitable for mounting on standard DIN rails. 1. Material: Nylon 2. Termination type: tubular screw with serrated pressure plate. 3. Current carrying parts (metal bodies): nickel or tin-plated copper. 4. Ground terminal blocks shall be dual color type: Green and Yellow. 5. Maximum conductor size: No. 8 AWG stranded. 6. Current rating: Up to 15 amperes at 250 volts AC. 7. Supply manufacturer jumper bridges, designed to fit on terminal blocks. Do not daisy -chain wiring. 8. Terminal Blocks to be Automation Direct (refer to drawings for catalog numbers required). E. Interposing Relays 1. Provide interposing relays as required and as shown on the drawings. 2. Provide DIN rail mounted type relays, with coils, contacts, and voltage ratings as required. Relays shall be Phoenix Contact #2966184. F. Regulated Power Supplies 1. Provide regulated DC power supply as required for PLC discrete inputs, 3 - transmitter power and instrument power. Size power supplies to include 100% spare capacity. 2. Power supplies shall be as follows: a. Input power: 110 Volts AC, 60 Hz. b. Output power: 24 Volts DC at 120 watts c. Output regulation: <1% d. Operating temperature: 0 to 50° C 17430-5 e. DIN Rail mountable. f. 24V DC, 5 Ampere, Power supply shall be Phoenix Contact #2866750. G. Signal Isolators 1. Provide 4 -wire type for use as a signal isolator, converter and/or repeater. 2. Input Signal: 4-20 mA DC. 3. Input Impedance: No greater than 50 ohms. 4. Isolation: 1000 -volt RMS output from input, power and ground; fully floating 5. Output Signal: 4-20 mA dc into 800 ohms minimum. 6. Accuracy: +/- 0.1% of span 7. Power Supply: 120 -volt ac, 60 hertz or 24-V DC 8. Enclosure: designed for high density DIN rail mount 9. Signal isolators shall be Phoenix Contact #2902014 (with associated power bus modules, Phoenix Contact #2864134 if required). H. Fused Terminal Blocks 1. Fused terminal blocks for 24V DC circuits shall be Automation Direct DN - F101110. Provide associated Bussmann fuse as indicated on the drawings. I. Thermal Circuit Breakers 1. Thermal circuit breakers shall be rated for 120V AC. 2. All thermal circuit breakers shall be 2 ampere as manufactured by Phoenix Contact TCP type. J. Power Circuit Breakers 1. Power circuit breakers shall be rated for 120V AC. Amperage shall be as indicated on the drawings. 2. All power circuit breakers shall be Allen Bradley type 1489-M1C150. 17430-6 K. 120V AC Surge Protection Devices (SPD's) 1. 120V AC SPD shall meet the following requirements : a. Protection level Up (L -N) < 1.1 kV b. Protection level Up (L -PE) < 1.5 kV c. Protection level Up (N -PE) < 1.5 kV 2. 120V AC surge protection devices shall be Phoenix Contact #2905228. L. 24V DC Surge Protection Devices (SPD's) 1. 24V DC surge protection devices shall be Phoenix Contact #2794669. M. CompactLogix Hardware 1. Provide and install new Allen Bradley CompactLogix system consisting of : One (1) 1769-L33ER processor; One (1) 1769-PA2 power supply; One (1) 1769-IQ16 24V DC discrete input module; One (1) 1769-0W8 AC/DC relay output module; One (1) 1769-IF8 analog input module; One (1) 1769- OF4 analog output module; One (1) 1769 -ECR right end cap as required. 2. Provide six (6) Allen Bradley 1784-SD2, secure digital cards for City of Clearwater use. O. Ethernet Switches 1. Unmanaged switches shall be provided as required. These devices shall be as follows : a. 24V DC input voltage. b. Unmanaged Ethernet switch with seven (3) copper ports and one (1) fiber port. c. PLC Control Panel Ethernet Switch shall be an Allen Bradley Stratix 2000 Allen Bradley 1783-US4T1F. P. Fiber Optic Patch Panels 1. Refer to specification 16795 for fiber optic patch panel requirements. 17430-7 X. Equipment Ground Bar Systems. 1. Provide equipment ground systems, Panduit series UGB2/0-414 with bonding standoffs, Panduit UGB-B-SO. 2. Refer to drawings for number of ports required. Z. Isolation Ground Bar. 1. Provide the PLC Control Panel with a 12 port isolation ground bar, Panduit series UGB2/0-414-12 with isolation standoffs, Panduit UGB-IN-SO. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ARC FLASH WARNING LABEL A. All PLC Control Panels with an Arc Flash warning label. The Arc Flash warning label shall meet the requirements of NFPA 70E 2018. B. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the City of Clearwater for any information required to determine the information required for the label which may include: 1. Arc Flash Hazard Boundary in feet 2. Incident Energy in cal/cm2 3. Working Distance in inches 4. Shock Hazard Exposure in VAC 5. Insulating Glove Class 6. Panel Condition when there is a Shock Hazard (i.e. When the door is opened) 7. Limited Approach Boundary in feet 8. Restricted Approach Boundary in feet 9. Prohibited Approach Boundary in feet 10. Equipment Name 11. Hazard Category 12. Minimum PPE Requirements END OF SECTION 17430-8 SECTION 17920 INSTRUMENT INDEX AND INPUT/OUTPUT SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, test, install and place in satisfactory operation all control system inputs and outputs as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. B. The Input/Output Schedule represents the UO points to the PLC. C. Schedule will be completed at time of submittal. 1.2 MODIFCATIONS REQUIRED TO INPUT/OUTPUT SCHEDULE A. Refer to Section 17120 — Programmable Loig Controller components for Input/Output modules to be added to the RTD Subpanel Programmable Logic Controller PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 INPUT/OUTPUT TYPES A. Input / Output types are as follows: DI - Discrete Input 1. DO - Discrete Output 2. AI - Analog Input 3. AO - Analog Output B. Inputs/outputs in addition to those scheduled shall be provided as necessary to accomplish all monitoring and control functions specified in the Contract Documents. 17920 - 1 PART 3 - CONTROL SYSTEM INPUT / OUTPUT SCHEDULE TAG NUMBER SERVICE INSTRUMENT TYPELE-5000 REMARKS PLC DI DO AlA STORAGE TANK #1 LEVEL TRANSMITTER CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 LE -5001 STORAGE TANK #2 LEVEL TRANSMITTER CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 FS -5800 EYEWASH STATION #1 FLOW SWITCH CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 FS -58001 EYEWASH STATION #2 FLOW SWITCH CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 SI -8440 CHEMICAL PUMP #1 DOSING RATE INDICATION CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 SI -8441 CHEMICAL PUMP #2 DOSING RATE INDICATION CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 AO -8440 CHEMICAL PUMP #1 DOSING PUMP FLOW CONTROL CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 AO -8440 CHEMICAL PUMP #1 DOSING PUMP FLOW CONTROL CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 HSA -8440 CHEMICAL PUMP #1 PUMP #1 IN AUTO INDICATION CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 HSR -8440 CHEMICAL PUMP #1 PUMP #1 IN REMOTE INDICATION CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 0I-8440 CHEMICAL PUMP # 1 PUMP #1 RUNNING INDICATION CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 OA -8440 CHEMICAL PUMP #1 PUMP #1 FAULT INDICATION CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 17920 - 2 IIIIII en NM N i N EN NM MN N R MB an N-- i — 111111 S OM A— i N r MN all M ! all all S N an am as um TAG NUMBER SERVICE INSTRUMENT TYPE REMARKS PLC DI D O AI A 0 HSA -8441 CHEMICAL PUMP #2 PUMP #2 IN AUTO INDICATION CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 HSR -8441 CHEMICAL PUMP #2 PUMP #2 IN REMOTE INDICATION • CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 0I-8441 CHEMICAL PUMP #2 PUMP #2 RUNNING INDICATION CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 OA -8441 CHEMICAL PUMP #2 PUMP #2 FAULT INDICATION CHEMICAL PUMP CONTROL PANEL 1 NOTE: TAG NUMBERS SHALL BE INDENTICAL AT BOTH THE MARSHALL STREET WRF AND NORTHEAST WRF. END OF SECTION 17920 - 3 SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND 1 CONTRACT 3 CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT 7 PROPOSAL/BID BOND 8 AFFIDAVIT 9 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 10 PROPOSAL 11 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET 13 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL 14 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 15 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES THAT BOYCOTT ISRAEL LIST CERTIFICATION FORM 16 SECTION V Page i Updated: 8/3/2018 ODYSSEY MANUFACTURING CO. January 17, 2018 Re: CORPORATE RESOLUTION FOR AUTHORITY TO SIGN BIDS, BID FORMS, CONTRACTS & PERMITS ON BEHALF OF ODYSSEY MANUFACTURING CO. To Whom It May Concern, WHEREAS, the Board of Directors of Odyssey Manufacturing Co. has determined it to be in the best interest of the Corporation to establish a Corporate Resolution. Be it: RESOLVED, The undersigned hereby certifies that Patrick H. Allman, its General Manager, is authorized to sign bids and all bid forms; to execute agreements and any documents associated with these agreements; and to sign any permit documents on behalf of Odyssey Manufacturing Co. Additionally, the undersigned is the duly elected and qualified Secretary and the custodian of the books and records and seal of Odyssey Manufacturing Co., a corporation duly formed pursuant to the laws of the state of Delaware and that the foregoing is a true record of a resolution duly adopted at a meeting of the Board of Directors and that said meeting was held in accordance with state law and the Bylaws of the above-named Corporation on January 17, 2018, and that said resolution is now in full force and effect without modification or rescission. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have executed my name as Secretary and have hereunto affixed the corporate seal of the above-named Corporation this 17th day of January, 2018. Stephen Sidelko, Sec arvi T. Ra -s, Pr:: dent CORPORATE SEAL -- Cr!;, r_VS3_Lt' :1 IVA FEI Z171 61 41:1• PROSURE GROUP BONDING TOGETHER. BUILDING TOGETHER 7217 Benjamin Road Tampa, FL 33634 r (813) 243-1110 0 (813) 243 -1109 fax 4115 contractbondsg'prosurearoup.com www.prosuregroup.coni This is the front page of the performance/payment bond issued in compliance with Florida Statute Chapter 255.05 THE PROVISIONS AND LIMITATIONS OF SECTION 255.05 FLORIDA STATUTES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE NOTICE AND TIME LIMITATIONS IN SECTIONS 255.05(2) AND 255.05(10), ARE INCORPORATED IN THIS BOND BY REFERENCE Bond Number: 107001836 Surety in which bond's written: Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America Local Address: 1 North Dale Mabry Highway, Suite 1005 Local Phone Number: Tampa, FL 33609 (888) 695-4625 Contractor/Principal Name: Odyssey Manufacturing Co. Address: 1484 Massaro Blvd., Tampa, FL 33619 Phone: (813) 635-0339 Owner of Property / Contracting Entity: City of Clearwater Address: 100 S. Myrtle Ave., Suite 220 Belleair, FL 33756 Phone: (727) 562-4750 Contract Number: 16 -0012 -UT Project Name: Marshall St. and Northeast WRF Alum Feed System Improvements Project Address: Project Description: 1605 Harbor Drive, Clearwater, FL. 33755 & 3290 SR 580, Clearwater, FL. 34695 Alum Feed System Improvements This bond has been furnished to comply with the requirements of F.S.A. 255.05. This bond is hereby amended such that all provisions and limitations, including conditions, motive and time limitation of F.S.A. 255.05 are incorporated herein by reference. Any provisions of this bond which conflicts with or purports to grant broader or more expanded coverage in excess of the minimum requirements of the applicable statute shall be deemed herefrom. This bond is a statutory bond, not a common law bond. This is the front page of the bond regardless of preprinted numbers on the other pages issued in compliance with F.S.A. 255.05 Pee form SURETY BONDS rce Bonds Contract Bonds I License ense Bonds I Court Bonds SECTION V Contract Documents Bond No.: 107001836 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (1) This bond is given to comply with § 255.05, Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in subsections (2) and (10). Pursuant to § 255.050)(b), Florida Statutes, "Before commencing the work or before recommencing the work after a default or abandonment, the contractor shall provide to the public entity a certified cony of the recorded bon4. Notwithstanding the terms of the contract or any other law governing prompt payment for construction services, the public entity may not make a payment to the contractor until the contractor has complied with this paragraph." CQNTRACTOR SURETY OWNER Travelers Casualty and Surety Company City of Clearwater Odyssey Manufacturing Co. of America Engineering Dept. 1 North Dale Mabry Hwy. 100 S. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33756 Tampa, FL 33609 (727) 562-4747 1484 Massaro Blvd. Tampa, FL 33619 (888) 695-4625 813-63S-0339 PROJECT NAME:. MARSHALL ST. & NORTHEAST WRF ALUM FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO.: 16 -0012 -UT PROJECT DESCRIPTION: The demolition of existing alum feed facilities and the installation of new alum feed facilities at the Marshall St. & NE Water Reelamation Facilities. BY THIS BOND, We, Odyssey Manufacturing Co. , as Contractor, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America , a corporation, as Surety, are bound to the City of Clearwater, Florida, herein called Owner, in the sum of $ 629,200.00, for payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally. THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Contractor: Performs the contract dated , between Contractor and Owner for construction of Marshall St. & Northeast Will+' Alum Feed System Improvements Project #16 -0012 -UT, the contract documents being made a part of this bond by reference (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Proposal, Contract, Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Plans, Technical Specifications and Appendix, and such alterations as may be made in said Pians and Specifications as therein provided for), at the times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and 2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes, supplying Contractor with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Contractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and SECTION V Page 1 of 16 Updated: 8/3/2018 SECTION V — Contract 'Documents Bond No.: 107001836 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (2) 3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Contractor under the contract; and 1. To the limits of § 725.06(2), Florida Statutes, shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, their officers and employees, from liabilities, damages, losses and costs, including, but not limited to, reasonable attorney's fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional wrongful misconduct of Contractor and persons employed or utilized by Contractor in the performance of the construction contract; and 5. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise it remains in full force. 6. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05{2), .Florida Statutes. 7. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance with any formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's obligation under this bond, and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of tinne, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day of November , 20 18 , (If sole Ownership or Partnership, two (2) Witnesses required). (If Corporation, Secretary only will attest and affix seal). Odyssey .Manufacturing Co. By: Title: Print Name WITNESS: / / WITNESS: Corpora Print N (affix corporate SECTION V or Witness eat)cis tj f c,,.. PrintName,• of/ 4. j}-/rr►-a_,1/ Travelers Casualty and Surety Compauy'pf America (Corporate Surety) By: 40 e, ATTORNEY -FACT Print Name David B. Shick, Attorneynt--Fact 8t' Licensed Florida Resident Agent #A24/4 76 (affix corporate seal) (Power of Attorney must be attached) Page 2 of 16 Updated. 8/3/2018 TRAVELERS J Attorney -In Fact No. WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER POWER OF ATTORNEY Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company 231239 Certificate No. O 07335863 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Farmington Casualty Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut, that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint David B. Shick of the City of Tampa , State of Florida , their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. 1 7th IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this day of August 2017 State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss. Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company By: Robert L. Raney, Senior Vice President On this the 17th day of August 2017 before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2021. 58440-5-16 Printed in U.S.A. V\.$34i4A C Marie C. Tetreault, Notary Public WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the following officers: President, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I, Kevin E. Hughes, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this day of t4 'e) %4 —+ 2019. Kevin E. Hughes, Assistant SePL7 ry To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at www.travelersbond.com. Please refer to the Attorney -In -Fact number, the above-named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (1) 441 This CONTRACT made and entered into this day of-14/VCihbeAt , 201.: by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and Odyssey Manufacturing Co., of the City of Clearwater County of Pinellas and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". [Or, if out of state:] This CONTRACT made and entered into this day of 20 by and between the City of Clearwater, ' Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and a/an(State) Corporation authorized to do business : in the State of Florida, of the City of County of and State of , hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: PROJECT NAME: Marshall St. & Northeast WRF Alum Feed System Improvements PROJECT NO.: 16 -0012 -UT in the amount of $ 629,200.00 In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, technical specifications, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. SECTION V Page 3 of 16 Updated: 8/3/2018 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (2) THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES, TO THE LIMITS OF § 725.06(2). In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the public construction bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such public construction bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. SECTION V Page 4 of 16 Updated: 8/3/2018 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (3) In addition to all other contract requirements as provided by law, the contractor executing this agreement agrees to comply with public records law. IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, THE CONTRACTORS DUTY TO PROVIDE PUBLIC RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT. CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC RECORDS AT 727-562-4092, Rosemarie.Call@myclearwater.com, 112 S. Osceola Ave., Clearwater, FL 33756 The contractor's agreement to comply with public records law applies specifically to: a) Keep and maintain public records required by the City of Clearwater (hereinafter "public agency") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder. b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as may be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law. c) Ensure that the public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the records to the public agency. d) Upon completion of the contract , transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency. e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time. f) The contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in accordance with the contract. g) A contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes. h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if: 1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public records request within a reasonable time; and SECTION V Page 5 of 16 Updated: 8/3/2018 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (4) 2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the public records request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor. i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Such notices must be sent by common carrier delivery service or by registered, Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic format. j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: William B. Horne, II City Manager Countersigned: By: - Secs/ k2ACeCk O5 George N. Cretekos, Mayor Attest: Rosemarie Call City Clerk Ap ved as t form: '7 /cI ( Owen Kohler Assistant City Attorney Contractor must indicate whether: Xx Corporation, Partnership, Company, or Individual Odyssey Manufacturing by (Contrac By: Print Name: '-trick Allt,rii Title: Gyral MEInager The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his ti) where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation — provide Affidavit. SECTION V Page 6 of 16 Updated: 8/3/2018 SECTION V — Contract Documents CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT TO OWNER: City of Clearwater PROJECT NAME: Marshall ST. & Northeast WRF Alum Feed System Improvements Engineering Dept. PROJECT NO.: 16 -0012 -UT 100 S. Myrtle Ave. CONTRACT DATE: f 1 Clearwater, FL 33756 BOND NO. : j , recorded in O.R. Book [ 1 Page { _ 1, of the Public Records of Pinellas County, Florida. CONTRACTOR: 1 Pursuant to § 255.05(11), Florida Statutes, and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the: [i ser t name of Surely, [address] on bond of ,SURETY, ,CONTRACTOR, hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that fmal payment to the Contractor shall not relieve Surety of any of its obligations to City of Clearwater Engineering Dept. 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 as set forth in said Surety's bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand this day of Attest: (Seal): ,OWNER, (Surety) (Signature of authorized representative) (Printed name and title) SECTION V Page 7 of 16 Updated: 8/3/2018 SECTION V — Contract Documents Bond No.: N/A PROPOSAL/BID BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, Odyssey Manufacturing Company as Contractor, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America as Surety, whose address is 1 North Dale Mabry Hwy. Tampa, FL 33606 , are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Ten Percent of Amount Bid in U.S. Dollars ($ 10% ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of Odyssey Manufacturing Company as Contractor, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America as Surety, for work specified as: Marshall St. and Northeast WRF Alum Feed System Improvement; Bid No.: 16 -0012 -UT all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Public Construction Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal/Bid Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Principal must indicate whether: X Corporation, Partnership, Company, or Individual Signed this 19th day of September , 2018 . Odyssey Manufacturing Company Contractor r/ nncipal By: Gcnem( /S'' Title Travelers Casual and Sure Com ' an of America. Surety David hick, Alto ey-in-lac! 8i Licensed FL Resident A 0ht #A241176 The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name l yd his till where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to Corporation — provide Affidavit. SECTION V Page 8 of 16 Updated: 8/3/2018 TRAVELERSJ Attorney -In Fact No. WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER POWER OF ATTORNEY Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company 231239 Certificate N°. 007335847 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Farmington Casualty Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut, that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint David B. Shick of the City of Tampa , State of Florida , their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this 17th day of August '' 2017 State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss. Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company By: Robert L. Raney, Senior Vice President On this the 17th day of August 2017 before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2021. 58440-5-16 Printed in U.S.A. C Marie C. Tetreault, Notary Public WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attomeys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the following officers: President, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I, Kevin E. Hughes, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this 1471/1. day of .?ier1tStiL.. - 20 IS . el..' fr.: Kevin E. Hughes, Assistant Sec tary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at www.travelersbond.com. Please refer to the Attorney -In -Fact number, the above-named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER 1 1 1 STATE OF FLORIDA ) ' COUNTY OF 1)4AI 'Mr) SECTION V—Contract Documents AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) 1 1004 Akavywb -70~pct 41156141 1cle, (Street & Number) t -r? 61cet l_o being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is Secretary of Od y ��:°vei f\ ar1:i&Cit r Co. a corporation organized and exist' g under and by virtue of the halts of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (City) (County) (State) Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of Oaf, 1a -�a f u r co. (Name of Corpora= Affiant further says that44- 6"(134..1 (Officer's Name) (Title) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for C4(° ~ C'tee""4 � 1 " °D12 or said corporation by virtue of 0 T Iwl £1&oil i'`f btf 8'27 \i) (state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of Board of Directors. If by Resolution give date of adoption). Affiant Sworn to before me this 3 day of , 20 i[111 Nota ;E 361nav\inq Qm0(ZRte2- aYo JOHANNA GONZALEZ MY COMMISSION # F'F763087 EXPIRES: September 24, 2018 Type/print/stamp name of Notary Title or rank, and Serial No., if any Page 9 of 16 Updated: 8/3/2018 �,�� P MARJORIE O'DONNELL 0 i°` 1°�._ Notary Public - State of Florida � Commission el FF 956574 i. %,, %:� 4 My Comm. Expires Mar 5, 2020 F '' '/ '"', Bonded through National Notary Assn. SECTION V — Contract Documents NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF Hillsborough ) Patrick Annuli being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is General Manager of Odyssey Manufacturing Canpany the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or a Affiant Sworn to and subscribed before me this 29 day of August ,2018 . SECTION V Page 10 of 16 Updated: 8/3/2018 SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for MARSHALL ST & NORTHEAST WRF ALUM FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS (PROJECT # 16 -0012 -UT) and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked MARSHALL ST & NORTHEAST WRF ALUM FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS (PROJECT # 16 -0012 -UT) Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Public Construction Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. SECTION V Page 11 of 16 Updated: 8/3/2018 SECTION V — Contract Documents PROPOSAL (2) Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on 'P-et`j'Ae-t for the sum of St y ( " dU Wn to ire t-1 ar A.,i�6. °' 7105—'.. ($ 4,2, 9 o (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's to 1 bid amount). The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub -contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: Marvin Rakes, President Stephen Sidelko, Secretary ADDRESSES: 4525 Blue Marlin Dr., Bradenton, F1 34208 2910 Luclde Rd., Weston, F1. 33381 Signature of Bidde The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. Patrick Allman Principal: By: Company Legal Name: Title: General Manager Odyssey Manufacturing Company Doing Business As (if different than above): same Business Address of Bidder: 1484 Massaro Blvd. City and State: Tampa, F1. Zip Code 3 3 619 Phone: 813 / 6 3 5- 0 3 3 9 Email Address: paLbnan@odysseymarlufacturing.can Dated at , this 19 day of September , A.D., 2018. SECTION V Page 12 of 16 Updated: 5/3/2018 SECTION V — Contract Documents CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: MARSHALL ST. & NORTHEAST WRF ALUM FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS (PROJECT # 16 -0012 -UT) Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. I Date: CI 13)Ib Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Patrick Allman of Odyssey Mfg. Ccmpany (Name of Bidder) re of Officer) General Manager (Title of Officer) 8/29/18 (Date) SECTION V Page 13 of 16 Updated: 8/3/2018 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION V — Contract Documents BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: MARSHALL ST. & NORTHEAST WRF ALUM FEED SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS (PROJECT # 16 -0012 -UT) CONTRACTOR: (°c1 yJ (I ° 4 ` ti CflelY) �n BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ 632.6111.- O CY (Numbers) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: S 1?• R-014seci v• -'‘‘,9N ihc2 14.00 lied)01l s (Words) THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A COPY OF A CURRENT CONTRACTOR LICENSE/REGISTRATION WITH THE STATE OF FLORIDA AND PINELLAS COUNTY. THESE DOCUMENTS MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE BID PROPOSAL PACKAGE. FAILURE TO PROVIDE THESE DOCUMENTS IN THE BID PROPOSAL WILL DEEM THE CONTRACTOR'S BID AS NON-RESPONSIVE. Marshall Street and Northeast WRF Alum Feed System Improvements Project # 16 -0012 -UT Item No. Bid Item Units Qty Unit Price Amount 1 Mobilization -Marshall Street WRF LS 1 1 ti COD $ t 1 000 - 2 Mobilization -Northeast WRF LS 1 II 600 $ til ©0 b - 3 Marshall Street WRF Alum Feed Improvements LS 1 WACO COO $ 2-60 0,0 4 Northeast WRF Alum Feed Improvements LS 1 24 ©� 000 $ Zit!, Subtotal 512 000 I'COO $ 511./ 000 7 Contingency 10% LS 1 $ 5`7 2.00. $ 5%2 00 - Total 6Z1 200 $ 1 ZQ,ZOD SECTION V Page 14 of 16 Updated: 8/3/2018 MARJORIE O'DONNELL •�� Pue`�: Notary Public - State of Florida Commission # FF 956574 Pc My Comm. Expires Mar 5, 2020 . Rt,t,`oss Bonded through National Notary Assn. /4f�-r-r-r—• SECTION V – Contract Documents SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM PER SECTIONIII, ITEM25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORMAS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. STATE OF Florida COUNTY OF HillstDmlgh The foregoing instrument was 20 18 , by Patrick Allman as the gyral tanager corporation/entity), personall ilzed Signature Patrick Allman Printed Name Geeral Manager Title Odyssey Manufacturing Ccnipany Name of Entity/Corporation acknowledged before me on this 29 day of August (name of person whose signature is being notarized) (title) of Odyssey Msunfartriring Company (name of known to me as described herein , or produced a (type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take an oath. V'J Notary P . blit nary rt ti p 1-)0't e My Commission Expires: 31 s( E--0 NOTARY SEAL ABOVE SECTION V Printed N Page 15 of 16 Updated: 8/3/2018 SECTION V — Contract Documents SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES THAT BOYCOTT ISRAEL LIST CERTIFICATION FORM PER SECTION III, ITEM 25, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORMAS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or engaged in a boycott of Israel; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or engaged in a boycott of Israel; and 3. "Boycott Israel" or "boycott of Israel" means refusing to deal, terminating business activities, or taking other actions to limit commercial relations with Israel, or persons or entities doing business in Israel or in Israeli -controlled territories, in a discriminatory manner. A statement by a company that it is participating in a boycott of Israel, or that it has initiated a boycott in response to a request for a boycott of Israel or in compliance with, or in furtherance of, calls for a boycott of Israel, may be considered as evidence that a company is participating in a boycott of Israel; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or engaged in a boycott of Israel. STATE OF Florida COUNTY OF Hillsborough sborough Patrick Allman Printed Name General Manager Title Odyssey Manufacturing Ca ipany Name of Entity/Corporation The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this 29 day of August , 20 l8, by Patrick Alltr�r (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the General Manager (title) of Odyssey Marnlfacturing Canpany (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein , or produced a of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take an oath. My Commission Expires: NOTARY SEAL ABOVE Notary lic in0.r on, c..; O Printed LIme MARJORIE O'DONNELL �U°-; Notary Public • State of Florida •• Commission # FF 956574 4�' ��:= My Comm. Expires Mar 5, 2020 ;'',,, d', Bonded through National Notary Assn. 0 SECTION V Page 16 of 16 Updated: 8/3/2018 RICK SCOTT, GOVERNOR JONATHAN ZACHEM, SECRETARY 0 STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION CONSTRUCT THE PLUMBING' PROVISI USING BOARD FIED UNDER THE TATUTES EXPIRATION DATE`: AUGUS 31, 2020 Always verify licenses online at MyFloridaLicense.com Do not alter this document in any form. This is your license. It is unlawful for anyone other than the licensee to use this document. INS — — — — — 111111 — NIB — — — 11111 — IIIb — — MIN — 1 RICK SCOTT, GOVERNOR JONATHAN ZACHEM, SECRETARY STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESSSAND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION `NSING BOARD :.UNDER THE TUTES EXPIRATION .D TE. xAUGUST 31, 2020 Always verify licenses online at MyFloridaLicense.com Do not alter this document in any form. This is your license. It is unlawful for anyone other than the licensee to use this document. N 111111 IN EN 111011 N — NM EN' N MN MB EN E —11111 (♦ STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL. REGULATION CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD I CGC1516698 The GENERAL CONTRACTOR Named below IS CERTIFIED Under the provisions of Chapter 489 -FS. IExpiration date: AUG 31, 2018 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 COGDILL, MICHAEL J ODYSSEY MANUFACTURINGC.O 1484 MASSARO BLVD . - • • ' • TAMPA FL 33815 ...._ .R. ...:.. � .. ISSUED: 06/22/2018 DISPLAY AS REQUIRED BY LAW RICK SCOTT, GOVERNOR CFC057182 SEQ # L1606220000900 S surd -op FLORIDA . . . " ...- . . DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION • • CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD KEN LAWSON, SECRETARY The PLUMBING CONTRACTOR Named below IS CERTIFIED Under.the provisions of Chapter 489 FS. Expiration date: AVG 31, 20.18 WING, DAVID ALBERT . ODYSSEY MANUFACTU 9500 134TH WAY I • J3 SEMINOLE • ISSUED: : . •SEQ # L1808220001 t#2$ 2017 - 2018 HILLSBOROUGH COUNTY BUSINESS TAX RECEIPT OCC. CODE I 190.000038 CLEANING PRODUCTS MANUFACTURER BUSINESS ODYSSEY MANUFACTURING CO 1484 MASSARO BLVD TAMPA, FL 33619 NAME ODYSSEY MANUFACTURING CO lico;kILING 1484 MASSARO BOULEVARD DRESS TAMPA, FL 336190000 1 EXPIRES SEPTEMBER 30, 2018 40 Employees 2O172O18 USINESS TAX RECEIPT HEREBY PAID A PRIVILEGE TAX TO ENGAGE IN BUSINESS, PROFESSION, OR OCCUPATION SPECIFIED HEREON ACCOUNT NO. 215900 RENEWAL Receipt Fee Hazardous Waste Surcharge Law Library Fee Paid 16-0-318710 09/28/2017 160.00 DOUG BELDEN, TAX COLLECTOR 8134364200 THIS BECOMES A TAX RECEIPT WHEN VALIDATED. 120.00 40.00 0.00 I-CGC1516698 Cogdill, Michael J 1484 Massaro Blvd Tampa, FL 33619 4,,,„.0 PINELLAS COUNTY CONSTRUCTION LICENSING BOARD THIS CERTIFIES THAT Michael J Cogdill DBA Odyssey Manufacturing Co STATE CERT # I-CGC1516698 HAS FILED HIS/HER LICENSE AND PROOF OF REQUIRED LIABILITY AND WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE WITH THIS BOARD. IN GOOD STANDING UNTIL September 30, 2018 DATE OF ISSUANCE 02/01/2018 * Please cut out license along lines I-CFC057182 Wing, David Albert 9500 134th Way N Seminole, FL 33776 49 PINELLAS COUNTY CONSTRUCTION LICENSING BOARD THIS CERTIFIES THAT David Albert Wing DBA Odyssey Manufacturing Co STATE CERT # I-CFC057182 HAS FILED HIS/HER LICENSE AND ; ROOF OF REQUIRED LIABILITY AND WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE WITH THIS BOARD. IN GOOD STANDING UNTIL September 30, 2018 DATE OF ISSUANCE 02/01/2018 '* Please cut out license along lines